JP7294964B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

As a game machine, there is a game machine capable of executing a suggestive performance suggesting control to be in an advantageous state and a preparatory performance for notifying that the suggestive performance will be executed before the suggestive performance is executed. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes an effect of stocking (displaying) arrows that change the pending display around the pending display.

JP 2017-131277 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is a risk that the interest may rather decrease due to the execution of another effect during the execution of the effect that raises the degree of expectation.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can maintain interest.

(A) The game machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player;
a control means;
a storage means capable of storing backup data;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
and a production determination means capable of deciding whether or not to execute the production ,
The control means is
capable of executing a first backup process of storing first backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of a first backup condition;
capable of executing a second backup process of storing second backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of a second backup condition;
The suggestive effect comprises a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect when executed. and a third suggestive effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is lower than that of the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The effect determining means executes respective effects of the first suggesting effect, the second suggesting effect, the third suggesting effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect. It is possible to individually decide whether or not
Based on the determination of the effect determining means, the suggestive effect executing means and the preparation effect executing means can execute the third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect in parallel during the same period. and
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. The production is easy to execute,
The preparation effect execution means is capable of executing the first preparation effect by a first pattern and a second pattern having a lower rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern when executed,
The first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the first pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period, while the first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the second pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period. and do not run
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the second suggestive effect corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) the game machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Control means (for example, production control microcomputer 120, etc.),
Storage means capable of storing backup data (for example, backup memory board 14, etc.),
The control means is
A first backup process (for example, transferring the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition. processing of transfers, etc.), and
A second backup process (for example, a backup memory) having a shorter execution time than the first backup process for storing second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition. processing of transferring store confirmation data to the board 14, etc.) can be executed in an order of priority different from that of the first backup processing (for example, the backup of store confirmation data is higher than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data). short execution time and high processing priority, etc.),
The storage means
a first storage area in which the first backup data is written and the second backup data is not written (for example, the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.);
a second storage area (for example, a second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) in which the second backup data is written and the first backup data is not written;
moreover,
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display forewarning effect, a timer effect, a chance forewarning effect, etc.) suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed,
The suggesting effects include a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. Including a third suggestive effect (for example, a chance eye notice effect) different from
The preparation effects include a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed. (For example, timer preparation production, etc.) and
The third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 32-11 (A1) and (A2)),
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. Production is likely to be executed (for example, see Figure 32-10)
It is characterized by

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. In addition, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means is not reported on the gaming machine (for example, log information indicated by manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1),
The information indicated by the second backup data stored by the storage means can be notified on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Based on the second backup data stored in the storage means, information indicated by the second backup data (for example, log information indicated by the store confirmation data) can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5, etc.) Display control means (for example, production control microcomputer 120 etc.)
The information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data) is not displayed on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on pachinko machine 1, etc.),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The first storage area has a first number (eg, three) of storage areas (eg, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.) in which the same first backup data is written. has
The second storage area has a second number (e.g., one) of storage areas (e.g., second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) that is smaller than the first number in which the same second backup data is written.
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
a first control means (for example, the main substrate 11, etc.);
A second control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 120, etc.), which is the control means,
The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means is reset. No (for example, in step 95AKS112, the data for manufacturer confirmation is backed up, but the store confirmation data is not backed up, etc.);
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when both the first control means and the second control means are reset (for example, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107). ),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) or (6) above,
When the voltage supplied to the second control means is below a predetermined value, a signal supply means (for example, power disconnection detection circuit 95AK010, etc.),
The second control means determines whether both the first control means and the second control means are reset based on whether or not the predetermined signal is supplied after the power is turned on. It is possible to identify whether only has been reset (for example, processing after 95AKS104),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to gaming machines of the following (8) to (12). Conventionally, in a game machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-131277, a suggestive effect suggesting that control is performed in an advantageous state, and a suggestive effect is executed before the suggestive effect is executed. There was one that was configured to be executable with a preparatory performance that foretells that. However, in such a gaming machine, there is a risk that the interest may be reduced by executing another effect during the execution of the effect that raises the expectation. There is a demand for the provision of a gaming machine that can maintain the

The gaming machine of (8) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a suggestive effect (for example, a hold display notice production, timer production, chance first notice production, etc.); and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a timer preparation effect, etc.), and the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and a second suggesting effect different from the first suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) and a third suggestive effect (for example, a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, and the preparatory effect foretells that the first suggestive effect will be executed. and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, a third suggestion effect, a second The first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 32-11 (A1) and (A2)), and either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. It is characterized in that the third suggestive effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed than when the second preparation effect is being executed (for example, see FIG. 32-10).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8) above, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in different periods (for example, after execution of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed) , a timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 32-7(D)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(10) In the gaming machine of (8) or (9) above, the first suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (e.g., first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode). (red), etc. See FIG. 32-3 (A)), and the first preparation effect is executed by one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (Large effect), etc. See FIG. 32-3 (B)), and depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed, the executable first suggestion production Effect mode is different (for example, when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the pending display notice effect is executed by one of the first to third effect modes, and the second effect mode When the pending display advance notice preparation effect is executed, the pending display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (10) above, the suggestive effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect (for example, if a pending display notice effect or a timer effect is executed When it is determined, it may be determined that the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are not executed (see Fig. 32-3 (B) and Fig. 32-4 (B)), and whether an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed Depending on whether or not, the ease of execution differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-3, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is determined to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in Figure 32-4, it is easy to determine if the timer effect is also executed.However, it may be determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed.Then, the pending display notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

(12) In any one of the gaming machines from (8) to (11) above, depending on whether or not the preparatory effect is executed, the ratio of which suggestive effect of the effect mode is executed differs (for example, When the performance mode of the pending display advance notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, the ratio of deciding to execute the suspension display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect compared to the case of determining the first effect mode. is high (see FIGS. 32-3(B) and 32-4(B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various circuits and the like mounted on the effect control board. 3A and 3B are diagrams showing a configuration example of a backup memory board; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control main processing, and processing priority. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of CPU exception event occurrence processing and an example of VDP error interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing for production control. It is a figure which shows the example of the content of the production|presentation control command for games. It is a figure which shows the example of the content of the production|presentation control command used as a test command. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of the reception order of test commands and the processing to be executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of a backup control table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of displaying a maintenance history screen; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of displaying a maintenance history screen; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 41AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 42AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 42AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 43AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 44AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a characteristic portion 45AK; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a backup storage section in a characteristic section 95AK, and manufacturer confirmation data and store confirmation data as backup data; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of backup processing in the characterizing portion 95AK; FIG. It is a block diagram of the production|presentation control microcomputer in characteristic part 95AK, and a power failure detection circuit. It is a timing chart showing a state when the pachinko game machine is reset. It is a timing chart showing a state when the effect control microcomputer is reset. It is a flowchart at the time of power-on of the production|presentation control microcomputer in the characteristic part 95AK. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing power failure date and time recording processing in a modified example of the characterizing portion 95AK; FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining recording timing of log information of a power failure date and time in a modified example of the characteristic portion 95AK; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing production patterns of big hit suggestive effects and set suggestive effects to be executed as suggestive effects during rear variable display. be. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the front variable display suggesting performance when execution of the big hit suggesting performance is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution of the set suggesting performance is determined. (C) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the character effect and the timer effect executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, (D) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of the character effect and the timer effect and the degree of execution expectation of the setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice effect determination table and a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table and a timer advance notice preparation effect determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice execution processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timings of a pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and a timer effect (preparation effect); FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect; It is a flow chart which shows an example of a chance notice setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the chance eye advance notice effect;

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1 according to this embodiment. A pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2 and a game machine frame 3. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an outer frame that rotatably supports the game machine frame 3 and the like. The game board 2 is a gauge board forming a game board surface. The game machine frame 3 is a frame for fixing the game board 2 . A game area surrounded by guide rails and the like is formed on the game board 2 . A game ball (game medium) shot from the shooting device passes through the shooting path and is hit into the game area. The game machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame having a glass window.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, there are a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, an image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, A normal pattern display 20, a first reservation display 25A, a second reservation display 25B, a normal pattern reservation display 25C, a passage gate 41, and the like are provided. In addition, the game board surface in the game area may be provided with a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, a general prize winning opening, an out opening, and the like. A game effect lamp 9 is provided on the periphery of the game area. Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for a game machine.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 . The hitting ball operation handle is operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area, and the resilience of the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation). At predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there are an upper tray (ball supply tray) for holding (storing) game balls and a lower tray (surplus) for holding (storing) surplus balls from the upper tray. ball storage dish) is provided. A stick controller 31A is attached to the member forming the lower plate, and a push button 31B is provided to the member forming the upper plate.

On the screens of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, etc., special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed. These variable displays are based on the occurrence of the first starting winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning hole formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, or to the normal variable winning ball device 6B It can be executed based on the generation of the second start winning prize by the game ball passing (entering) the formed second start winning hole. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are respectively configured using, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special design (special design), which is information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variably displayed). The image display device 5 is configured using, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of special symbols (first special symbol or first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special symbol game and special symbols (first special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B 2 special design or second special design) variable display, for example, in the decorative design display area that becomes a plurality of variable display parts such as three, the decorative design that is identification information (decoration identification information) is variable Is displayed. The variable display of this decoration pattern is also included in the variable display game. As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged.

A reserved memory display area 5H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the reserved memory display area 5H, a reserved display is performed for identifiably displaying the reserved number of variable display corresponding to the special figure game (special figure reserved memory number). The pending display may be anything that can be displayed in correspondence with the pending storage of information relating to the variable display. Along with the pending memory display area 5H, or instead of the pending memory display area 5H, the pending display using the first pending display 25A and the second pending display 25B may be performed.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of various substrates, peripheral devices, and the like. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with various boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a lamp output board 13, a backup memory board 14, and an effect data memory board 16 as shown in FIG. In addition, a relay board 15, a performance control relay board 17, an audio output board 18, a driver board 19, and the like are also mounted. Furthermore, various substrates such as a power supply substrate, a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a touch sensor substrate, etc. may be mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and electrical components are mounted, but also electrical components are mounted (mounted) on electronic circuit boards to achieve specific electrical functions. It is a concept including an electronic circuit mounting board configured as follows.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that power from an AC power supply, which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 by the power supply board. It is The power supply board includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC), etc. I have. The power supply voltage generated by the power board may be supplied to the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the like via the drawer relay board.

The main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like. In the main substrate 11, signals received from various detection switches such as the gate switch 21, the starting switch (the first starting switch 22A and the second starting switch 22B), and the count switch 23 are sent through the switch circuit 110. It is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 . The gate switch 21 detects a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 (a gate-passing ball). Based on the detection of the gate passing ball by the gate switch 21, the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display 20 can be executed. The first starting opening switch 22A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A. The second starting opening switch 22B detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The count switch 23 detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 . When game balls passing through various winning openings such as the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening are detected, the number of prize balls is determined in advance corresponding to each winning opening. A game ball as is paid out.

In the main board 11, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is transmitted through the solenoid circuit 111 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. Solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in a state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (or does not pass) and a state in which it is easy to pass (or passes) through the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. and changeable. A solenoid 82 for a large winning opening door makes the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 changeable between a state in which a game ball cannot pass and a state in which the game ball can pass. From the main board 11, a command signal for controlling the display of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 and the like is transmitted.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a RAM 102 for providing a work area for game control. , a CPU 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data representing random numbers independently of the CPU 103, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. configured with. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, for example, a random number circuit 104 and a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 generate various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game. Numerical data to indicate is counted (generated) in an updatable manner. A random number used to control the progress of a game is also called a game random number.

The main board 11 has a setting key 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting switch functioning as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big win (ball output rate) in the setting change state. A changeover switch 52 is connected. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be installed at predetermined positions on the main board 11, or may be attached outside the main board 11, for example, at predetermined positions on the power supply board. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by operating a predetermined key is opened. Only the person in charge who owns it can operate it. Since the setting key 51 requires a key operation, only a staff member who has a key for operating the setting key 51 can operate the setting key 51 among staff members of the game arcade. The setting key 51 is a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF by a predetermined key operation, and is also a switch that can perform an operation different from the switching operation (for example, pressing operation).

Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable are connected to the main board 11. Based on the detection signals output from these sensors, , and a function to determine the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors). A switch circuit 110 on the main board 11 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) includes each winning opening (first large winning opening, second large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entering area ”), and the display monitor 29 displays various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios. By displaying such winning information, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. On the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, it is common to design the game board surface so that game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. is checked (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of adjustment after installation and the details thereof.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. , a game effect lamp 9, a performance motor 60, a performance LED 61, and other performance devices, various circuits for controlling performance operations by various performance electric parts are mounted. The production control board 12 controls the image display in the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the light-emitting members constituting the game effect lamp 9 and the production LED 61, and the production motor 60 for moving the production movable member. It has a function of determining the control contents for causing the electric parts for performance to execute a predetermined performance operation, such as the driving operation of the. Electronic components such as an effect control microcomputer 120, an external ROM 121, and an external RAM 121 are mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG.

The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting video signals to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting illumination signals to the lamp output board 13, and backup memory board 14. Wiring for transmitting control signals and the like, wiring for transmitting performance data signals to and from the performance data memory board 16, and the like are connected. Wiring for transmitting various signals to the audio output board 18 and the driver board 19 is also connected via the effect control relay board 17 . The information signal transmitted to the audio output board 18 may include an audio signal (sound effect signal) designating audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 19 may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the performance movable member by driving the performance motor 60 . The information signal transmitted to the driver board 19 may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting the performance LED 61 . A wiring for receiving an operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 12 . The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that a player's motion using the stick controller 31A has been detected. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the player's motion using the push button 31B has been detected.

The lamp output board 13 is a board for lamp output that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and according to the illumination signal from the effect control board 12, a driver IC or the like that supplies a drive current to the game effect lamp 9 or the like. is installed. The backup memory board 14 is a board for storing backup data provided separately from the effect control board 12, and according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 12, it is possible to execute the writing process and the reading process of the backup data. It is configured. The backup data write process writes and stores the backup data in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the effect control board 12 or the like. The effect data memory board 16 is a board for storing effect data provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is configured to be able to read out the effect data according to the effect data control signal from the effect control board 12. ing. The effect data reading process reads the effect data stored in the effect data memory and transmits it to the effect control board 12 or the like. The performance data memory board 16 is equipped with a performance data memory capable of storing performance data. The performance data memory includes a storage area for storing various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, a storage area for storing various sound data representing sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a performance motor 60. A storage area for storing various motor data indicating the details of drive control, a storage area for storing various light emission data indicating details of lighting control for the game effect lamp 9 and the performance LED 61, etc. may be provided in advance. The effect data memory may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as flash memory such as NAND-ROM, or a non-volatile recording medium such as magnetic memory or optical memory. Any one of the above may be used.

The effect control relay board 17 is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 2, and relays various signals transmitted from the effect control board 12 toward the audio output board 18 and the driver board 19.例文帳に追加The back pack may be attached to the central portion of the back side of the game board 2, and an opening facing the image display device 5 may be formed in the center. The back pack may be provided so as to cover part or all of the main substrate 11, the lamp output substrate 13, the audio output substrate 18, and the driver substrate 19 from behind. A performance control board box in which part or all of the performance control board 12, the backup memory board 14, and the performance data memory board 16 are accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack. The main board 11 may be accommodated in a board case together with setting keys 51 and setting changeover switches 52 that can be operated by a game hall attendant or the like. In this case, the display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 arranged on the main board 11 may also be accommodated in the board case. The setting key 51, the setting changeover switch 52, and the display changeover switch 30 may be exposed through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case. The audio output board 18 is a board for audio output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and according to the audio signal from the effect control board 12, to output the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R serving as sound output devices. Various circuits are installed. The driver board 19 is a drive control board provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the information signal from the effect control board 12, the drive signal of the effect motor 60 and the lighting signal of the effect LED 61 A driver IC and the like to supply are mounted.

A security cover may be attached to cover the substrate case housing the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the rear side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. In a state where the game machine frame 3 is closed, a security cover covers the substrate case housing the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加As a result, the setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 are inoperable when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. When the game machine frame 3 is open, the security cover is separated from the substrate case, so that the operation of the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 is permitted. The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. In addition, by covering the board case including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 with the security cover, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command may include a display control command. A display control command is used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 . The effect control command may include a voice control command. Audio control commands are used to control the audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R. The effect control command may include a lighting control command. The lighting control command is used to control the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the performance LED 61 . The movable control command is used for motion control of the performance movable member by the driving force of the performance motor 60, and the like. Each of these commands may constitute an effect control command separately, or a combination of some or all of them may constitute an effect control command.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided. Incidentally, the random number circuit 104 is not limited to being built in the game control microcomputer 100 , and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100 .

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals. The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of various random numbers used to control the progress of the game.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 11, and a fluctuation pattern table storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The table data etc. to be used are stored.

FIG. 3 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. Some or all of the electronic components such as the production control microcomputer 120, the external ROM 121, and the external RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 are detachable by inserting or removing a connector pin from the connector socket. may be attached, and other components may be mountably attached by soldering or the like. Connectors 150 to 156 are mounted on the effect control board 12 together with these electronic components. The performance control microcomputer 120 includes a CPU 131, an internal ROM 132, an internal RAM 133, a watchdog timer 134, a timer circuit 135, an interrupt controller 136, a serial communication circuit 137, a clock circuit 138, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 140, and an audio processing circuit. 141 , lamp control circuit 142 , and motor control circuit 143 . The production control microcomputer 120 may be a production control microprocessor that integrates these electronic components. The CPU 131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. The internal ROM 132 fixedly stores a basic program of control processing executed by the CPU 131 such as firmware, system setting data specific to the production control microcomputer 120, and the like. The internal RAM 133 provides a work area for the CPU 131 . The watchdog timer 134 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time passes the monitoring time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The CPU 131 periodically clears and restarts the watchdog timer 134 . When the processing of the CPU 131 is delayed due to some failure or the like and the watchdog timer 134 cannot be cleared and the measurement time elapses, a timeout signal is generated and the processing by the CPU 131 is reset.

The timer circuit 135 is configured by incorporating, for example, four channels (CH0 to CH3) of an 8-bit programmable counter, and is a circuit capable of generating real-time interrupts and measuring time. The timer circuit 135 starts counting down at predetermined intervals from an initial count value set in advance for each channel, and when there is a channel whose count value becomes "00", the interrupt flag corresponding to that channel is set to ON state. do. At this time, if the interrupt is enabled, the timer circuit 135 causes the interrupt controller 136 to generate an interrupt request to the CPU 131 . The timer circuit 135 may have a function as an RTC (Real Time Clock). The RTC can measure the current date and time and output date and time information including date information and time information.

The interrupt controller 136 is a circuit capable of controlling various interrupt requests generated by the effect control microcomputer 120 . The interrupts controlled by interrupt controller 136 include multiple types of interrupts, such as X-class interrupts (XIRQ), I-class interrupts (IRQ), software interrupts (SWI), and illegal opcode traps (ILGOP). You can The interrupt controller 136 has an interrupt control register for setting the permission/prohibition of interrupt and the priority of interrupt for each type of interrupt. For example, the interrupt controller 136 may be provided with interrupt control registers corresponding to various interrupts, such as serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting. Note that the V-sync interrupt is an interrupt that coincides with the timing at which a vertical synchronization signal is output from the VDP 140 that draws an effect image or the like on the image display device 5 . The interrupt control register corresponding to each interrupt contains internal information data (interrupt permission/prohibition data) indicating whether the corresponding interrupt is permitted or not, and internal information data (interrupt priority) indicating the priority of the corresponding interrupt. data) can be set. For example, if the value of the interrupt permission/prohibition data is "0", the corresponding interrupt is set to the enabled state, and if the value of the interrupt permission/prohibition data is "1", the corresponding interrupt is disabled. state. The interrupt priority is set by, for example, interrupt priority data in 16 steps (4 bits). (=FH)”, the priority of the corresponding interrupt is the lowest. Not limited to interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting. , an interrupt control register may be provided for any interrupt related to the control of the presentation.

The internal information data set in the interrupt control register is set in advance in a predetermined area (program management area, etc.) of the internal ROM 132 . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 131 sets the serial communication circuit 137, sets the random number generation, sets the internal reset operation, etc. according to the setting contents of the program management area. At this time, the internal information data of interrupt control registers corresponding to various interrupts, such as serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting provided in the interrupt controller 136, are set. As a result, serial reception interrupts, timer interrupts, V sync interrupts, etc. are set. For example, in the interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V sync interrupt setting, the interrupt permission/prohibition data in the internal information data all indicate a value of "0", and the serial The receive interrupt, timer interrupt, and Vsync interrupt are all set to the enabled state. The interrupt priority data in the internal information data is such that serial reception interrupts have a higher priority than timer interrupts, and timer interrupts have a higher priority than V sync interrupts. are set with corresponding 4-bit values. A reset controller may be provided inside or outside the interrupt controller 136 . The reset controller controls various resets generated by the effect control microcomputer 120 . Resets controlled by the reset controller include system resets and user resets. A system reset occurs when a low level signal is input to the SRST terminal for a certain period of time. The user reset is triggered when a low-level signal is input to the URST terminal for a certain period of time, when the timeout signal of the watchdog timer 134 is generated, and when an out-of-designated-area travel prohibition (IAT) signal is generated. It occurs due to a predetermined user reset factor, such as when it occurs.

The serial communication circuit 137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data by a serial communication method to various boards and various circuits other than the effect control board 12 . The serial communication circuit 137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data compatible with multiple types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is an asynchronous serial communication standard, and transfers communication data using a start bit and a stop bit. In this case, the clock signal line becomes unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) becomes relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock-synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using a clock signal. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines are provided respectively corresponding to a clock signal, a transmission data signal, a reception data signal, and a slave selection signal. In the case of I2C, signal lines corresponding to clock signals and data signals are provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards. The clock circuit 138 is a circuit that generates a clock signal to be supplied to each circuit of the production control microcomputer 120, such as the CPU 131 and the VDP 140, for example. For example, the clock circuit divides the external clock input to the clock input terminal to generate an internal system clock signal and supplies it to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 120 .

The VDP 140 determines control details of image display in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 140 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays. The VDP 140 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 140 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The audio processing circuit 141 can generate audio signals used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 131 and VDP 140. FIG. The lamp control circuit 142 can generate an illumination signal corresponding to a lighting mode (light-emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, or blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the performance LED 61 . The motor control circuit 143 can generate drive control signals used to drive the performance motor 60 .

The external ROM 121 contains, as specific contents of the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 120, various data such as instruction codes constituting system programs and user programs executed by the CPU 131, management data, table data, effect control patterns, and the like. is permanently stored. The external RAM 122 serves as an auxiliary area for the internal RAM 133 and temporarily stores various data. The connectors 150 to 156 are configured using, for example, receptacles, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. The connectors 150 to 156 make it possible to output various signals via different paths such as mutually different wiring patterns in the effect control board 12 . The connector 150 is a connector port for main substrate wiring that can connect the main substrate wiring that is electrically connected to the main substrate 11 . The connector 151 is a connector port for power supply wiring to which power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 152 is a connector port for effect relay wiring that can connect the effect relay wire that is electrically connected to the effect relay unit such as the effect control relay board 17 . The connector 153 is a connector port for frame lamp wiring that can connect the frame lamp wiring electrically connected between the lamp output board 13 and the frame lamp portion on which part or all of the game effect lamp 9 is provided. be. The connector 154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring that is electrically connected to a backup unit such as the backup memory board 14 can be connected. The connector 155 is a connector port for effect data wiring to which the effect data wiring electrically connected to the effect data part such as the effect data memory board 16 can be connected. The connector 156 is an inspection wiring connector port capable of connecting an inspection wiring that is electrically connected to an information processing apparatus (such as a personal computer) for inspection, testing, or development. The inspection information processing device may function as an inspection device for the pachinko game machine 1 by executing a specific software program, for example. Thus, the connector 156 is an electronic component used as a connection member to which the inspection device of the pachinko game machine 1 is connected.

The connector 156 can be connected to an inspection wiring at, for example, the trial production stage, the development stage, or the manufacturing stage of the pachinko game machine 1, and the production control microcomputer 120 is shipped according to a test command different from the production control command. A previous inspection process may be made executable. Pre-shipment inspection process, for example, before the completion of the software program during prototyping or development, internal parameters and input/output signals when the performance control microcomputer 120 executes part or all of the program code, It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming machine installation island, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be operated independently on a personal computer. It may also be an execution environment in which the operating status can be checked by connecting to an information processing device such as. In addition, the connector 156 can be connected to an inspection wiring at the stage of collecting the pachinko game machine 1, for example, and can execute the reading process of the backup data according to a test command different from the effect control command. good. Alternatively, the connector 156 may be removed at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Alternatively, the connector 156 is installed only in a predetermined model such as a demonstration or test model other than the model of the pachinko game machine 1 installed in the game hall, and the model (mass production machine) that is mass-produced and installed in the game hall It may not be mounted. A land on which the connector 156 can be mounted may be formed on the board surface of the effect control board 12 . When the connector 156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land where the connector 156 is no longer mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portions of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed using, for example, a cream solder printer, or may be performed by any method that does not use a cream solder printer. . When the connector 156 is mounted and when it is not mounted, the same soldering process may be performed, or different soldering processes may be performed. When the soldering process is performed in the same process, there is no need to fabricate multiple patterns of the metal mask used in the cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, thus preventing an increase in the costs required to fabricate the board. Soldering the unmounted lands, such as the connector 156, on which electronic components are not mounted prevents oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevents problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and appropriately maintains the quality of the board. be able to.

In addition, when an electronic component such as the connector 156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to being soldered and coated. It may be coated. By covering the lands on which electronic components are not mounted in this way, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board. I wish I could. On the other hand, lands on which electronic components are not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when lands are soldered, solder as a conductor adheres to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, by not soldering the lands on which electronic components are not mounted, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in wiring patterns and changes in current paths, and ensure proper board quality. can be maintained. By performing insulation film treatment instead of soldering, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in wiring patterns and changes in current paths, and appropriately maintain the quality of the board. You may do so.

FIG. 4A shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory board 14. FIG. The backup memory board 14 is provided with a memory controller 200, an RTC 201, a serial communication circuit 202, a test connection section 203, backup data memories 210A to 210D, and a connector 220. FIG. Thus, the backup memory board 14 is provided with backup data memories 210A to 210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 200 can perform write processing and read processing of backup data according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 12 . The RTC 201 can measure the current date and time and supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 200 . The serial communication circuit 202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the effect control board 12 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 202 may be capable of transmitting/receiving communication data conforming to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 202 only needs to have a communication processing section with a hardware configuration compatible with such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connecting portion 203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion, such as a test point, including terminals capable of inputting and outputting inspection signals. When the test connection portion 203 is a test point, the test probe is brought into contact with the test connection portion 203, and input/output of the test signal is performed between the test device and the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12. or read backup data. The inspection connection unit 203 receives an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 or the backup data memories 210A to 210D without going through the performance control microcomputer 120 of the performance control board 12. It may also be possible to perform output, readout of backup data, and the like. In this way, the testing connection section 203 can provide an interface for performing data communication with the testing device, which is an external device, in the backup memory board 14 .

The backup data memories 210A-210D may be configured in part or in whole using non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and in part or in full using SRAM (Static RAM) with a battery. may be configured using The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured using flash memory such as NAND-ROM, EEPROM, or HDD (Hard Disk Drive). A non-volatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and even when the operating power supply is turned off, the memory written in the memory cell remains unchanged. No data is lost. A configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require a battery backup for data retention, and achieves high-speed writing, high number of rewrites, and low power consumption compared to non-volatile memories such as flash memory, EEPROM, and HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve operation efficiency, and appropriately store and save backup data. In addition, the disposal of the battery becomes unnecessary, the disappearance of the stored contents due to the replacement of the battery is prevented, and the backup data can be properly stored and preserved. The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. In this manner, the backup data memories 210A to 210D can retain their stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be capable of holding stored contents without using a backup power source, for example, when part or all of them are configured using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 210A and 210B may be able to retain their stored contents using a backup power supply, for example, when part or all of them are configured using battery-equipped SRAMs.

The backup memory board 14 uses the date and time information output by the RTC 201 to store and store various types of log information in log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D. The memory controller 200 can perform write processing and read processing of stored data to the backup data memories 210A to 210D according to commands and instructions sent from the performance control microcomputer 120 of the performance control board 12. In this case, by executing the write process and read process of the stored data indicating the log information including the date and time information, the operation history, setting history, It is sufficient if the error history and the like can be stored so as to be verifiable after the fact.

FIG. 4B shows a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 . The performance control board 12 has a connector 154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 . The backup memory board 14 is provided with a connector 220 detachable from the connector 154 of the effect control board 12. - 特許庁By coupling the connector 154 and the connector 220, the performance control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 can be physically and electrically connected. A connector 154 provided on the performance control board 12 has terminals TM01 to TM06. A connector 220 provided on the backup memory board 14 has terminals TM11 to TM16. Terminals TM01 to TM06 provided in connector 154 and terminals TM11 to TM16 provided in connector 220 are physically and electrically connected to corresponding terminals (for example, terminal TM01 and terminal TM11) when connector 154 and connector 220 are coupled. It is sufficient if the relationship is connected to

A terminal TM01 provided in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. A terminal TM02 provided in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 can receive a specific voltage VD1 used for confirming connection with the backup memory board 14 . For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 of the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 is supplied to the terminal TM11 of the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 . Terminals TM11 and TM12 of connector 220 may be short-circuited on the substrate of backup memory substrate 14 . Therefore, when the connector 154 and the connector 220 are coupled, a voltage corresponding to VD1 is supplied from the terminal TM12 of the connector 220 on the backup board 14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 on the effect control board 12. be. On the other hand, in the unconnected state in which the connector 154 and the connector 220 are not coupled, the supply of voltage to the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 in the effect control board 12 is not performed.

In the effect control board 12, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board . In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the performance control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to voltage non-supply, it can be determined that the performance control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 are not connected (unconnected state). In this way, the connection state between the performance control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 may be checked based on the voltage at the terminal TM02, which serves as a connection checking member. It should be noted that the connection state is not limited to being confirmed based on the terminal voltage, and the connection state may be confirmed based on the input state of a specific signal, for example. Alternatively, the connection state may be confirmed using a switch or sensor as a connection confirmation member.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 provided in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 are wire-connected to the serial communication circuit 137 provided in the effect control microcomputer 120 . The terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 are connected to the serial communication circuit 202 by wiring. Therefore, the wires connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 220 are connected via the serial communication circuit 137 and the serial communication circuit 202 to the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board. Electrical connections are provided so that stored data can be transferred to and from the 14 backup data memories 210A-210D. The terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 are wire-connected to the test connecting portion 203 . As a result, the wires connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 220 are connected via the serial communication circuit 137 to the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board 14 for inspection. An electrical connection is provided between the connection unit 203 and transmission/reception of inspection signals and transfer of stored data.

The backup memory board 14 is configured to be detachable from the performance control board 12 . As a result, for example, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1 that does not use the backup data memories 210A to 210D, the backup memory board 14 can be removed, thereby increasing the flexibility of the device configuration and increasing the manufacturing cost. can be prevented. In addition, since the stored data can be read and analyzed by removing the backup memory board 14, the workload of checking the stored data can be reduced. The RTC provided in the timer circuit 135 of the performance control microcomputer 120 provided in the performance control board 12 may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing performances in which, for example, a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 are interlocked. There is a need for relatively high accuracy. On the other hand, the RTC 201 of the backup memory board 14 only needs to be able to identify the context of the memory processing executed for the backup data memories 210A to 210D. can be done. As described above, the RTC 201 of the backup memory board 14 only needs to be of relatively low accuracy, so that an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. In addition, the structure and function with which the backup memory board|substrate 14 is provided may be comprised so that the production|presentation control board 12 may be provided. For example, the configuration and functions of backup data memories 210A-210D may be implemented by external RAM 122. FIG. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern in the effect control board 12, or a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is played using game balls as game media, and a predetermined game value can be imparted based on the game result. As an example of a game using game balls, when a player performs a predetermined operation (for example, rotating operation) on a ball hitting operation handle provided at the lower right position of the game machine frame 3 in the pachinko game machine 1, a predetermined A game ball as a game medium is shot toward the game area by a shooting motor or the like provided in the hitting ball shooting device. When the game balls flowing down the game area pass through (enter) various winning holes, the game balls are paid out as prize balls. For example, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 can execute the normal pattern game. In the general pattern game, variable display of normal patterns is performed, and when a specific normal pattern that is a normal pattern winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". When the variable display of the normal pattern is performed and the normal pattern which becomes the normal pattern losing pattern other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". In the case of "general figure hit", opening control is performed to open the normal variable winning ball device 6B in a predetermined period, and the second start winning opening is opened. When the game ball passes through the first starting winning hole formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the first starting winning occurs. When the game ball passes through the second starting winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting winning occurs. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize and the second start winning prize, the variable display of special symbols and decoration symbols can be executed. The special symbols include the jackpot symbols and the winning symbols. When the jackpot symbols are stopped (derived), the variable display result becomes "big hit", and when the winning symbols are stopped (derived), the variable display results. is "losing". When the result of the variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is a "big hit", the big prize opening is opened to allow the game ball to easily pass through (enter), thereby creating an advantageous state for the player. It will be in a jackpot game state.

The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG. In the game control main process, it is set to prohibit interrupts (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

After the initial setting, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear switch is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board, and when the power is turned on with the clear switch on, a clear signal in the on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If such a clear signal has not been input, it may be determined in step S3 that the clear switch is off. The backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 that serves as a backup RAM for game control. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S3, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on, and if it is on, it is determined that there is backup data. It is determined whether or not the backup data saved in this manner matches when the power supply is stopped and when the power supply is restarted, for example, using a parity bit or checksum. If they match, it can be determined that the backup RAM is normal in step S3.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) and setting confirmation processing (step S5) are executed. In the recovery process of step S4, the work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, it is sufficient that the fluctuation of the special symbols can be resumed from the state before the restoration. If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) and a setting change process (step S7) are executed. In the initialization process of step S6, a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102 is performed, and initial values are set in the work area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. For example, the setting confirmation condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on at the start of power supply when the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed. Established when both conditions are satisfied. If the output signal from the door open sensor 90 is OFF or if the setting key 51 is OFF, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, and the setting confirmation process is terminated. When the output signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is established. It is to be noted that the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including that the clear switch is turned off is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear switch is off, the fact that the clear switch is off can also be included in the setting confirmation condition. In the setting confirmation process of step S5, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, the shooting of the game ball by operating the batted ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, the accompanying game stop state is ended, and a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. For example, the setting change condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON at the start of power supply when the setting change process of step S7 is executed. Established when both conditions are satisfied. Also, the setting change condition may include that the clear switch is on. In the setting change process of step S7, if the output signal from the door open sensor 90 is OFF, if the setting key 51 is OFF, or if the clear switch is OFF, the setting change condition is established. It is determined that there was not, and the setting change process is terminated. When the output signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON, when the setting key 51 is ON, and when the clear switch is ON, it is determined that the setting change condition is established. . When the setting change condition is established, a setting change state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a setting change start command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. For example, every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the set value is updated as "1"→"2"→"3"→"1"→. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the This notifies the staff of the game arcade or the like that the new set values have been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 . When ending the setting change state, the accompanying game stop state ends, and a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the performance LED 61 may emit light in a predetermined manner. When the settings are being checked or changed, based on the detection of the operation of pressing an operation button for presentation such as the push button 31B, a message such as "maintenance mode" is displayed and the maintenance mode is entered. may be configured. The "maintenance mode" includes, for example, the date and time setting in the RTC of the timer circuit 135, various error occurrence history (recording when and what kind of error occurred), setting change history (when the set value was changed, and so on). In this mode, you can check the record of the setting value after change). When the setting key 51 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode may also be terminated.

In this way, if the setting key 51 is on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on) when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step S7 are performed. is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. On the other hand, if the setting key 51 is turned off when the power is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed, but the setting change state is not controlled, and the clear switch is turned on. If it is off, the restoration process of step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process of step S5 or the setting change process of step S7, the random number circuit setting process is executed (step S8). The random number circuit setting process is a process for initializing the random number circuit 104 so that the numerical data representing the game random numbers can be updated. The random number circuit 104 may autonomously update the numerical data indicating the game random number even if the random number circuit setting process by the CPU 103 is not executed. Subsequently, an interrupt initialization process is executed (step S9). The interrupt initial setting process is a process in which permission or rejection of interrupt and priority can be set according to the interrupt factor generated in the game control microcomputer 100 . For example, the CPU 103 reads the interrupt initial setting information stored in a predetermined area (program management area, etc.) of the ROM 101, and sets permission/prohibition and priority of the interrupt according to the read value for each interrupt factor. . Interrupt initial setting process, by performing the register setting of the CTC that is built in the game control microcomputer 100, a predetermined time (such as 2 milliseconds) including the process of generating a periodic timer interrupt every You can Thereafter, after setting the interrupt permission (step S10), the loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (eg, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. The CPU 103 that receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request executes game control timer interrupt processing.

The game control timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 103 may include switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, and command control processing. . The switch process is a process of determining whether or not there is a detection signal received by the CPU 103 from various switches via the switch circuit 110 . The main-side error processing is processing for diagnosing an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issuing a warning according to the diagnosis result. The information output processing includes, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), starting information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, This is a process that enables the output of data such as probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variation state has occurred). The game random number update process is a process that allows software to update at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side. The special symbol process process is a process that enables execution and suspension management of a special symbol game, control of a big hit game state and a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like. Normal pattern process processing includes management of execution and suspension of a normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), and variable winning balls based on "normal pattern winning". This is a process that makes it possible to control the opening of the device 6B. The command control process is a process that enables the effect control command set for transmission to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 .

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, first, the starting winning determination process is executed. After executing the starting prize determination process, one of a plurality of processes is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102 . The processing that can be selected according to the value of the special symbol process flag is special symbol normal processing, variation pattern setting processing, special symbol variation processing, special symbol stop processing, jackpot opening pre-processing, jackpot opening middle processing, jackpot opening post-processing, It is only necessary to include part or all of the processing according to the game control program, such as jackpot end processing, small win opening preprocessing, small win opening processing, and small winning end processing.

In the starting winning determination process, it is determined whether or not the first starting winning or the second starting winning has occurred, and if it has occurred, setting for updating the number of pending memories is performed. The number of pending memories indicates the number of variable displays of special symbols and decorative symbols that have not yet started. In the special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start execution of the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit". Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, setting of a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, etc. is performed corresponding to the variable display result. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variable display result and the like. In the special symbol variation process, setting for varying the special symbol, setting for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation, and the like are performed. In the special symbol stop process, setting for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol and stopping and displaying (deriving) the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is performed.

In the big win opening pre-processing, setting for opening the big winning opening in the big win game state corresponding to the variable display result "big win" is performed. In the process during the opening of the big win, it is determined whether or not to return the big winning opening opened in the big win game state to the closed state. In the process after opening the jackpot, after returning the jackpot to a closed state, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit. Settings for ending the jackpot game state are performed. In the jackpot end processing, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending performance for notifying the end of the jackpot game state elapses, setting for starting variable probability control and time saving control is performed. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to the "small hit", setting for opening the big winning opening in the small winning game state, and the like are performed. In the process during opening of the small hit, determination of whether or not to return the large winning opening opened in the small hit game state to the closed state is performed. In the small winning end processing, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for reporting the end of the small winning game state is executed elapses. Settings are made to continue.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. In the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) can be changed. The setting value consists of three levels from "1" to "3", with "1" having the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value in the order of "1", "2", and "3", the higher the ball payout rate. . That is, when "1" is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of "2" and "3". It should be noted that the odds of winning a small hit may be the same regardless of the set value.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with the random number MR1 for display result determination are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is the object of variable display. And when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2" (second), that is, the second special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is the object of variable display For each case, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set. 6A shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "1", FIG. 6B shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "2", and FIG. The display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "3" is shown.

When the set value uses the display result determination table corresponding to "1", if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display If the set value is "2" or "3", a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-variable probability, 1/32 at variable probability). When the set value is "1" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), part of the determination value is set as a determination value corresponding to the small hit, and the set value is If the set value is "1", the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set value is "2" or "3". When the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the same judgment value as when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is "1" (first) as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit It is set, and even if the second special symbol is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 at non-variable, 1/32) to win the jackpot. If the set value is "1" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), half of the judgment value is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. As in the case where the values are "2" and "3", a small hit is won with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is the object of variable display.

When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value "2", if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), the set value is higher than the case of "1" Win a big hit with a probability (1/300 for non-probability, 1/30 for probability). When the set value is "2", if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit 1) The same determination value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the probability is the same as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) to win a big hit. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value "3", if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), the setting value is "1", "2" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than the case (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). When the set value is "3", if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second 1) The same determination value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the probability is the same as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable) to win the jackpot.

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, and determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win. When the value of MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to a small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. As a result, the winning of the big win and the winning of the small win are determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" here indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to control to a big win game state, and the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are changed to the big win symbols. It is also a matter of deciding whether to Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, and the stop symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is small. It is also to decide whether or not to use a winning pattern. The odds of winning a small hit may differ according to the set value. For example, similar to the winning probability of the big win, the odds of winning the small win may be increased in the order of "1", "2", and "3". The setting difference of the winning probability of the small win may be set to have the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big win. If the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "1" is 1/100, the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "2" is designed to be 1/93.75, and the setting value "3". It may be set so that the probability of winning a small hit in 2 is 1/87.5. When the pachinko game machine 1 is not provided with a small hit, a display result determination table excluding the hit determination value corresponding to the small win may be used. A big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is made by the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer value. A common table is used to determine the small hit, and a separate table is used when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first) and when it is "2" (second) may be used. It may be configured such that the order of the advantage changes according to the game state. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability/high base state, is maintained in the high probability/high base state until the next big win occurs, and is configured so that a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained in a small win game. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2, and it can be a period in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball, so a specific game state (in this example, High Probability / High Base State), unlike other game states, the set value "1" is the setting with the highest degree of advantage, in which it is difficult for a big hit to occur (high probability / high base state is likely to continue). may After being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state), when applied to a gaming machine where the probability change state ends based on the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times (the probability change end count), even if it is the same probability change end number For example, the variable probability continuation rate (continuous home rate) may be configured to increase in the order of set value "1"<set value "2"<set value "3". The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be two or four or more.

When the result of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is "big win", the big win type may be set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these may be As the jackpot types, there may be provided jackpot types in which many prize balls can be obtained, jackpot types in which few prize balls can be obtained, or jackpot types in which few prize balls can be obtained. To determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of jackpot types A to C based on a random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a ``jackpot''. You may provide the jackpot classification determination table referred to. In the jackpot type determination table, a decision value may be assigned so that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the set values is "1" to "3". For example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determination to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", the percentage of determination to the jackpot type B is high, and the set value is "3". , the determination value may be assigned such that the percentage of the jackpot type A being determined is high.

A fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period in the jackpot game may be determined for each jackpot type. The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which pre-processing for the opening of the special symbol process is executed on the main board 11 side, and the start of the big win game state is started after the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side. This is the period in which the fanfare effect as the effect action to be notified is executed. The interval period is, for example, on the main board 11 side, a period during which the special symbol process processing after the opening of the jackpot is executed. It is a period during which an interval production is executed as a production operation for notifying the start of the round. The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big hit end processing of the special symbol process is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and the ending performance as a performance operation for notifying the end of the big win game state is executed on the performance control board 12 side. It is the period during which As an example, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period may be set to be the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, the longest in the case of the jackpot type B, and the shortest in the case of the jackpot type C. . When the set value is "1", the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to become relatively short if the ratio of judgment as the jackpot type C increases. When the set value is "3", if the ratio of judgment as jackpot type A increases, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to become relatively long. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be lengthened in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3".

The probability of winning a jackpot (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of set values ``1'' < ``2'' < ``3'', and at the same time, the set values ``1'' < ``2'' < ``3''. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be lengthened in this order. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, thereby increasing the gambling property. can be prevented from becoming too high. During the big win game, it may be constituted so as to be able to execute a big win suggesting performance suggesting a set value. The jackpot suggesting effect can be executed during the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. Also, by directing the player's interest to the effect suggesting during the big win, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the length of each period. In the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image, etc.) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is executed in common. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set regardless of the set values. Any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of selecting the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in which relatively long periods are set is high in the order of jackpot types A<B<C. By doing so, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period can be lengthened in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3".

The number of times of time reduction control and probability variable control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high accuracy control and time reduction control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are performed by the jackpot game. After the end of the state, the game may be continuously executed until a big win occurs again. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, a jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the percentage of big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variable probability continuation rate (continuous game rate) may be made to differ for each set value. For each jackpot type, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, presence/absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, and the number of times of control may be changed to give different advantages. In this case, the performance during the round may be different for each big win type, or may be the same regardless of the big win type. Depending on the set values, there may be one or a plurality of jackpot types that cannot be determined among jackpot types A, jackpot types B, and jackpot types C. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%), or to set a specific jackpot type to 100%. It involves determining percentages. The fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period may be made different regardless of the jackpot type. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to which of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, according to which of the set values "1" to "3", a lottery process is performed according to the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are determined. You may It is sufficient if the interest in the game can be improved by changing the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is "jackpot" according to the set value. The jackpot type may be determined using the random number MR1 for display result determination. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁

A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. The special period may be the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Using the RTC of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like, a predetermined time period (for example, from 10:00 am to 11:00 am) may be set as a special period. The period until the first big hit occurs may be the special period. In the special period, the ratio of normal reach loss is higher than in the non-special period, and even if the variation pattern judgment table in which the judgment value is assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the set values becomes larger good. As a result, during the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of execution of normal reach than during the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the special period. It is possible to increase the game interest.

In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values. For example, in the case of the specific setting value, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, a limit is set such that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this way, within a range in which the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the judgment value of the production judgment table is assigned so that the setting suggestion production can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this way, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the CPU 131 executes the effect control main process. A program for executing the effect control main process may be stored in advance in one or both of the internal ROM 132 and the external ROM 121 . Thus, part or all of the program for executing the effect control main process may be stored in advance in the internal ROM 132 or the external ROM 121 .

FIG. 7A is a flow chart showing an example of an effect control main process executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. FIG. In the effect control main process, an initialization process is executed (step S21). In the initialization process of step S21, one or both of the external RAM 122 and the internal RAM 133 are cleared, various initial values are set, and register settings of the timer circuit 135 are initialized. After the initialization process, an initial operation control process is executed (step S22). In the initial motion control process of step S22, control for initial motion of the movable member for presentation, such as control to return the movable member for presentation to the initial position by driving the motor for presentation 60 and control for confirming the operation, is executed. . After the initial operation control process, power-on information processing is executed (step S23). In the power-on information processing in step S23, a process of storing log information including the date and time of power-on may be executed. Data representing the log information is written and stored as backup data in log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board . The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 transmits a control signal corresponding to the backup command for power-on to the backup memory board 14 via the serial communication circuit 137 . In the backup memory board 14, in response to the backup command indicated by the control signal received by the memory controller 200 via the serial communication circuit 202, the date and time information obtained from the RTC 201 is used to write the log information including the power-on date and time. Processing should be executed. In the power-on information processing in step S23, backup restoration processing may be executed to restore settings and controls based on the log information stored in the log area.

After the power-on information processing, an interrupt initial setting process is executed (step S24). In the interrupt initial setting process of step S24, it is sufficient if the priority of interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller 136 can be initialized. The priority of interrupts controlled by interrupt controller 136 may be set based on interrupt priority data stored in advance in a program management area or the like provided in one or both of external ROM 121 and internal ROM 132 . For example, the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt, and the effect control timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V sync interrupt. should be set. Then, after setting the interrupt permission (step S25), the loop processing is entered.

FIG. 7B shows a setting example of processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120. FIG. The processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120 may be determined in advance based on the specifications of the effect control microcomputer 120 together with the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 136 . As an example, the processing when a CPU exception event occurs has the highest priority, followed by VDP error interrupt processing. It suffices if the processing priority is set in advance so that the priority of . Note that the VDP error interrupt process may be executed based on the occurrence of an interrupt factor controllable by the interrupt controller 136 . In this case, for example, the priority of the interrupt may be set by the interrupt initial setting process in step S24 so that the VDP error interrupt has the highest priority. The CPU exception event occurrence process is a process that is executed when an exception event due to an internal state abnormality or the like occurs in the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 . A CPU 131 exception may occur when decoding an undefined instruction that is not defined within the instruction set. CPU 131 exceptions may occur when performing invalid operations such as division by zero or overflow. A CPU 131 exception may occur when a storage protection violation occurs in virtual memory. An exception event of the CPU 131 may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) miss that causes an error in translation from a virtual address to a physical address. The VDP error interrupt process is a process that is executed when an error interrupt request occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state of the VDP 140 of the effect control microcomputer 120 . The VDP 140 error interrupt request may occur in response to VDP 140 exception events, as in the case of the CPU 131 . In addition, the error interrupt request of the VDP 140 may occur when there is a setting error in the clock signal (dot clock) used for display control of the image display device 5 . An error interrupt request for the VDP 140 may occur when there is an abnormality in decoding moving image data. The VDP 140 error interrupt request may occur when there is an audio data decoding error. A VDP 140 error interrupt request may occur in response to a system reset in VDP 140 . In this way, the CPU exception event processing is executed when an exception event of the CPU 131 occurs. The VDP error interrupt process is executed when an error interrupt request for the VDP 140 occurs. Therefore, when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the CPU 131 is satisfied, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed. When an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the VDP 140 is satisfied, VDP error interrupt processing is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing and the VDP error interrupt processing can be executed when an event occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control device or processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 is established.

FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, exception preprocessing is executed (step S41). In the exception pre-processing of step S41, control information for instruction code execution is saved in a predetermined area (such as a stack area) of the internal RAM 133, for example. The control information for instruction code execution may include a stored value of a program counter (PC) and a value of a program status word (PSW). Following the exceptional preprocessing, an exceptional backup process is executed (step S42). In the exceptional backup process in step S42, a process of storing log information including exceptional event information is executed. In this case, a control signal corresponding to the backup command for exception event occurrence is sent to the backup memory board 14 . The backup instruction for when an exceptional event occurs may include exceptional event information that indicates an exceptional event that has occurred in the CPU 131 so as to be identifiable. The exception event information may identifiably indicate the type of exception event. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives the backup command for exception event occurrence, the date and time information obtained from the RTC 201 may be used to write the log information including the exception event information.

After the exceptional backup process, other exceptional processes are executed (step S43). In step S43, for example, the vector table may be accessed and an exception handling routine may be started by jumping to the acquired exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the CPU 131 may be saved. If the exception event could be resolved by the exception handling routine, or if the exception event could not be resolved and a reset occurred, a backup process similar to step S42 is executed, and if the exception event could or could not be resolved, It may be possible to store the log information when there is no log. When the exception handling is finished, the exception post-treatment is executed (step S44), and the CPU exception event occurrence handling is finished. In the post-exception processing of step S44, the values stored in the internal registers (general-purpose registers, etc.) of the CPU 131 are restored, and the control information for executing the instruction code is restored. Just do it.

FIG. 8B is a flowchart showing an example of VDP error interrupt processing. In the VDP error interrupt process, first, preprocessing for error interrupt is executed (step S51). In the error interrupt pre-processing of step S51, for example, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (such as a stack area) of the internal RAM 133 . Following the error interrupt preprocessing, error interrupt backup processing is executed (step S52). In the error interrupt backup process of step S52, a process of storing log information including VDP error information is executed. In this case, a control signal corresponding to the backup command for when a VDP error occurs is transmitted to the backup memory board 14 . The backup command for when a VDP error occurs may include VDP error information that identifiably indicates an error that has occurred in the VDP 140 . The VDP error information may identifiably indicate the type of VDP error. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives a backup command when a VDP error occurs, the date and time information obtained from the RTC 201 may be used to write log information including VDP error information.

After the error interrupt backup process, another error interrupt process is executed (step S53). In step S53, it is possible to branch to the interrupt processing routine by jumping to the acquired interrupt handler address according to the interrupt factor corresponding to the VDP error, for example. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the CPU 131 may be saved. If the VDP 140 can autonomously execute recovery processing from an internal error, it may wait until it receives a notification of the completion of recovery or a notification of the occurrence of a reset due to inability to recover. Upon receipt of these notifications, backup processing similar to that of step S52 may be executed to store log information when the VDP 140 recovers from the error state or cannot recover. When the error interrupt process ends, the error interrupt post-process is executed (step S54), and the VDP error interrupt process ends. In the error interrupt post-processing of step S54, the values stored in the internal registers (general-purpose registers, etc.) of the CPU 131 are restored, and the control information for executing the instruction code is restored, so that the processing before the VDP error occurred can be restored. And it is sufficient.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes exception backup processing in step S42. The VDP error interrupt processing includes error interrupt backup processing in step S52. In the exceptional backup process in step S42, data including exceptional event information about the CPU 131 among the plurality of electronic components is stored in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 as backup data indicating log information. A write operation is performed to write to the area. In the error interrupt backup process in step S52, data including VDP error information regarding the VDP 140 among the plurality of electronic components is stored in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 as backup data indicating log information. A write process is executed to write to the log area. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when an exception event of the CPU 131 occurs, assuming that an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the CPU 131 is satisfied. The VDP error interrupt process is executed when an error interrupt request for the VDP 140 is generated, assuming that an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the VDP 140 is satisfied. In this way, when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the control device or processing device, such as the CPU 131 or the VDP 140, is established, information about a plurality of electronic components is written to a storage area such as a log area. A write process can be performed for storage.

After setting the interrupt permission by step S25 of the effect control main processing, a timeout occurs in a predetermined channel of the timer circuit 135 every predetermined time (such as 2 milliseconds), and the interrupt controller 136 to the CPU 131 Then, an interrupt request signal corresponding to the timer interrupt for effect control is output. CPU131 which received this interruption request signal and accepted an interruption request starts execution of timer interruption processing for production control.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 131 . In the effect control timer interrupt process, a command analysis process is executed (step S71). In the command analysis process of step S71, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect Setting and control corresponding to the control command are performed. Following the command analysis process, an effect control process process is executed (step S72). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the effect LED 61, the effect motor 60 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. In addition, regarding the control content of the performance operation using various performance devices, various judgments related to performance are performed according to the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11, or the elapsed time or detection result depending on the progress of the game or performance. Decisions, settings, etc. are made.

After the production control process, the production random number update process is executed (step S73). In the effect random number update process of step S73, at least part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. After the effect random number update process, effect mode change process is executed (step S74). For example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled in three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and depending on which effect mode is being controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 It is only necessary that the types of characters appearing in the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are different. The control to change from the current production mode to a different production mode may be performed when the production mode change condition is satisfied. For example, based on the date and time information acquired from the RTC provided in the timer circuit 135, when a specific date or time comes, the effect mode change condition may be established and the effect mode may be changed. Alternatively, the lottery process using the random number for effect may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed when the effect mode change condition is satisfied according to the determination result.

An error notification process is executed following the effect mode change process (step S75). In the error notification process of step S75, control for notifying various errors that have occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. Notification by such control may include left-hand driving notification and full-tank notification. The left-handed notification is a notification that prompts the player to perform a left-handed operation based on, for example, the total number of times the game ball has passed through a passage gate provided in the right area of the game area. The left-handed notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "Aim left!" It may also include occasional notifications, or a combination of some or all of these. The full tank notification is a notification that, when the full tank state of the surplus ball storage tray (lower tray) is detected, urges the player to eliminate the full tank state based on the elapsed time that the full tank state has continued. . The full tank notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "The lower tray is full!" or a combination of some or all of these may be included. In addition, the error notification process, in response to the occurrence of an error specified by the game control error specification command transmitted from the main board 11, by display, lighting or light emission, sound output, or a combination of some or all of these , and includes control for notifying various errors that have occurred. Alternatively, regardless of the game control error designation command, according to the processing result of the CPU 131, when it is determined that an error related to electronic parts including the effect device has occurred, display, lighting or light emission, sound output, or By combining some or all of these, control may be performed to notify various errors that have occurred.

After the error notification process, the maintenance mode process is executed (step S76). In the maintenance mode process of step S76, control is performed to enable display of the maintenance history screen and setting change/confirmation history screen. On the maintenance history screen, for example, when a setting confirmation display corresponding to the setting confirmation state or a maintenance mode menu screen is being displayed, detection of an operation that is an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the game hall is performed. Based on the result, it becomes possible to display when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. FIG. The image display device 5 displays a maintenance history screen including the read log information as history information. The setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that a setting change/confirmation history selection operation has been performed, based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, which is an operation by the game hall attendant. Become. When the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, all setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. FIG. The image display device 5 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen including log information of the read setting change and setting confirmation as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation performed by the person in charge of the pachinko game machine 1 manufacturer, unlike the person in charge of the game hall. good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change/confirmation history screen are screens that the player of the pachinko machine 1 cannot see while playing the game. Just do it.

After the maintenance mode process, the current time setting process is executed (step S77). In the current time setting process of step S77, control for setting the current date and current time is performed. In this case, it is possible to input the setting information of the current date and current time based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the game arcade. For example, an hour signal indicating the hour, a minute signal indicating the minute, a second signal indicating the second, a year signal indicating the year, a month signal indicating the month, a day signal indicating the day, and a day of the week signal indicating the day of the week are set and inputted. The CPU 131 receives them sequentially. By updating the information stored in the RTC in the timer circuit 135 according to these received signals, it is sufficient to change the setting of the current date and the current time measured by the RTC of the timer circuit 135 . By updating the information stored in the RTC 201 provided on the backup memory board 14 according to the input setting information, the setting of the current date and current items measured by the RTC 201 may be changed. When the current time setting process ends, the date and time information storage process is executed (step S78). In the date/time information storage process of step S78, control is performed to store the date/time information in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 at a predetermined cycle (every 100 milliseconds, etc.). The date and time information stored in the temporary area may be stored as log information indicating the date and time of power failure when receiving a RAM clear notification command or power failure restoration designation command from the main substrate 11 . And after performing backup processing during production control (step S79), the timer interruption processing for production control is ended. In the backup process during effect control in step S79, backup data indicating various types of log information is stored in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 when a preset backup condition is established. A storage process is performed to store and store. In this case, the log information to be stored may be information including some or all of the operation history, setting history, error history, etc. regarding a plurality of electronic components used for games and effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, the log information may include date and time information indicating the date and time when it was stored.

FIG. 10 shows an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted for the game from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 . In the following, the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command receivable by the effect control microcomputer 120 has a 2-byte structure, the first byte being MODE data representing the command classification, and the second byte being EXT data representing the command type. The leading bit (bit 7) of the upper data (MODE data) of the effect control command is always set to "1", and the leading bit (bit 7) of the lower data (EXT data) of the effect control command is always set to "0". be done. It should be noted that the effect control command is not limited to a 2-byte configuration, and a control command configured with, for example, 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The performance control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 as the game progresses. The effect control microcomputer 120 receives one of the effect control commands as the game progresses. In this way, the effect control command is a game effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 in accordance with the control relating to the progress of the game. is.

The variation start command 80XXH designates the start of variation for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which are a plurality of special symbols. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the variation start command, may be 01H at the start of variation of the first special symbol, and 02H at the start of variation of the second special symbol, for example. The variation pattern designation command 81XXH designates the variation pattern of the decoration design to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the variation pattern designation command, indicates a value corresponding to the variation pattern. The display result designation command 8CXXH designates the display result of variable display. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the display result specifying command, indicates a value corresponding to the display result of the variable display. The symbol determination command 8F00H designates to end the variation of symbols. The RAM clear notification command 9000H notifies that the memory contents of the RAM 102 are cleared due to the initialization in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on and the power supply is started. The setting change start command 9100H designates the start of a setting change state in which setting values can be changed when power supply is started by power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The power failure recovery specification command 9200H specifies execution of power failure recovery processing corresponding to power failure recovery. The setting change end command 93XXH designates the end of the setting change state. In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. For example, command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to "1", command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to "2", and command 9302H specifies that the setting value is set to "3". Specifies that it is set. Alternatively, only the command 9300H with EXT data of 00H may be prepared as the setting change end command, and the command 9300H may specify the end of the setting change state regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, a set value designation command for designating a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be prepared as an effect control command different from the setting change end command. In addition to the case where the setting value designation command is transmitted along with the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, along with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, the fluctuation start and correspondence in each round of the special game may be sent as In addition, the set value designation command may be transmitted along with execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times, such as every 10 times of variable start in the special game. Instead of or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the winning start designation command or the winning end designation command. A set value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

The setting confirmation start command 9400H designates the start of a setting confirmation state in which setting values can be confirmed when power supply is started by power-on in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The setting confirmation end command 9401H designates the end of the setting confirmation state. The game state designation command 95XXH designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state, time saving state) The second game state designation command corresponding to . The game control error specification command 96XXH specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) related to game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the game control error designation command, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. , the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) may be notified by error notification processing. The customer waiting demonstration designation command 9F00H designates the display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (demonstration screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the stoppage of the progress of the game in the customer waiting state. The hit start specifying command A0XXH specifies display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The large winning opening open specifying command A1XXH specifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The post-opening of the big winning opening designation command A2XXH designates a period in which the big winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The hit end designation command A3XXH designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big win game state or the small win game state. The background designation command B0XXH designates the display state of the background screen according to the game state or the like. The first reserved memory number designation command C1XXH designates the first reserved memory number. The first reserved memory number is the reserved number of variable display corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A among the reserved memory numbers, and is, for example, any value of "0" to "4". The second reserved memory number designation command C2XXH designates the second reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number is a variable display reserved number corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B among the reserved memory numbers, and is, for example, any value of "0" to "4". Winning determination result specification command C3XXH specifies the winning determination result. The winning determination result is when the first starting opening switch 22A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting opening opening, or when the second starting opening switch 22B has passed (entered) the second starting opening opening. When a ball is detected, numerical data indicating a game random number extracted from, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is used to determine whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot". and the results of determining the fluctuation pattern. That is, before determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the winning determination result is the result of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state, or whether it becomes a specific variation pattern. The result of determining whether or not is shown.

FIG. 11 shows an example of contents of a production control command that is a test command that the production control microcomputer 120 of the production control board 12 can receive. The effect control command, which is a test command, also has a 2-byte configuration, like the game effect control command. The performance control command, which is a test command, has upper data (MODE data) set to any of F0H to F3H. These high-order data (MODE data) are values that are not used in game effect control commands, and may be prepared in advance as dedicated commands for performing various inspections. Note that the test command is not limited to a 2-byte configuration, and a control command configured with, for example, 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The test command is not included in the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 as the game progresses. A test command is transmitted from an inspection device as an external device connected via a signal wiring to, for example, the connectors 150 and 156 or the inspection connection portion 203 provided on the backup memory board 14, and the effect control board 12 Based on the reception of the effect control microcomputer 120, it becomes possible to execute inspection processing corresponding to the received command. In this way, the effect control command serving as a test command is a game effect transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 as the game progresses. Unlike the control command, it is an effect control command for inspection that enables execution of inspection processing for performing various inspections.

The black screen display command F000H causes the image display device 5 to display a test black screen. The test black screen is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The ROM check screen command F005H displays on the screen of the image display device 5 execution results and version information of various ROM inspection processes such as the external ROM 62AK120. The red display command F020H causes the image display device 5 to display a red screen, which is a screen for display inspection whose display color is red. The green display command F021H causes the image display device 5 to display a green screen, which is a screen for display inspection whose display color is green. The blue display command F022H causes the image display device 5 to display a blue screen, which is a screen for display inspection whose display color is blue. The white display command F023H causes the image display device 5 to display a white screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is white. The black display command F024H causes the image display device 5 to display a black screen, which is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The RTC value type specification command F1XXH specifies the type of RTC value. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the RTC value type designation command, indicates values corresponding to the type of RTC value, such as year, month, date, day of the week, hour, minute, and second. The RTC value setting command F2XXH sets specific contents and values for the type of RTC value specified by the RTC value type specifying command F1XXH. XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of the RTC value setting command, indicates values corresponding to specific numerical values for year, month, day, hour, minute, and second, and corresponds to days of the week from Sunday to Saturday. value.

The check process designation command F3XXH designates execution of various check processes as inspection processes. For example, XXH, which is lower data (EXT data) of a command specifying check processing, may indicate a unique value that differs between one check processing and another check processing, or indicate a value common to multiple types of check processing. If there is a case, it is good. The check process specification command F3XXH constitutes a plurality of test commands, and when received in a predetermined order as a combination of a plurality of test commands, if it is possible to execute various check processes that become inspection processes. good. In addition, as the order of receiving a plurality of test commands predetermined corresponding to various check processing, which is an inspection processing, a plurality of types of orders are predetermined, and the order in which a combination of the plurality of test commands is received is determined in advance. It is sufficient if it is possible to execute different inspection processes depending on the type.

FIG. 12 shows a setting example of the reception order of test commands and the processing to be executed according to the reception order list. Backup clear, external RAM check (short), external RAM check (long), and backup inspection are prepared in advance as processes that can be executed by combining a plurality of test commands. FIG. 12A shows the order in which combinations of multiple test commands are received when performing backup clear processing. FIG. 12B shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing external RAM check (short) processing. FIG. 12C shows the order of receiving a combination of a plurality of test commands when executing external RAM check (long) processing. FIG. 12D shows the order in which combinations of multiple test commands are received when performing backup inspection processing. In the reception order shown in FIGS. 12A to 12D, a combination of a plurality of test commands is received in order from top to bottom, and when all the reception orders match, the corresponding processing is executed.

The backup clear process is a process for initializing the storage contents of backup data. The backup data is, for example, data stored in log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14, and indicates various types of log information. The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes for checking whether or not data can be appropriately written to and read from the storage area of the external RAM 122 . The external RAM check (short) process is a process that can be executed in a shorter time than the external RAM check (long) process, and may include processing contents that are simpler than the external RAM check (long) process. . Backup inspection processing is inspection processing that is executed based on the storage contents of backup data. In this case, the backup data read from the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 may be output to an inspection device as an external device.

The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes that enable the state of an electronic component such as the external RAM 122 to be inspected. Backup inspection processing is inspection processing that enables confirmation of information on various electronic components based on the storage contents of backup data indicating log information. In this way, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 can execute an inspection process that enables inspection or confirmation of the state of electronic components by combining a plurality of test commands. A combination of a plurality of test commands according to the order of reception is composed of commands specifying check processing, etc., in which the upper data (MODE data) of the received commands are all F3H. In this way, the combination of a plurality of test commands received for executing the inspection process is configured as a combination of production control commands for inspection that are different from the production control commands for games received as the game progresses. . Therefore, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic parts is not executed based on the reception of the game effect control command. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection processing for inspecting the state of the electronic parts from being erroneously executed based on the performance control command for the game received as the game progresses, and to carry out an appropriate inspection. can be done. In addition, for example, since it reduces the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed while the game is in progress, it prevents troubles caused by misunderstanding that the gaming machine has been damaged due to the erroneous execution of the inspection process. It is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by an interruption and improve the reliability of inspection processing.

A combination of a plurality of test commands received when performing backup clear processing includes a command that is F311H among commands specifying check processing and the like. A combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing an external RAM check (short) process includes a command that is F312H among commands specifying check process and the like. A combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing the external RAM check (long) process includes a command that is F313H among the commands specifying the check process and the like. A combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing the backup inspection process includes a command F314H among commands specifying check process and the like. None of these commands are included in the combination of multiple test commands received when executing other processes. In this way, a combination of test commands received to perform a particular inspection process may be a unique test command not included in a combination of test commands received to perform other inspection processes. may contain. For example, among the specified commands for check processing, commands such as F303H and F304H are used to execute backup clear processing, external RAM clear (short) processing, external RAM clear (long) processing, and backup inspection processing. is also included in the combination of multiple test commands received. In this way, a combination of test commands received to perform a particular inspection process includes common test commands that are also included in a combination of test commands received to perform other inspection processes. You can stay. Also, for example, among commands specifying check processing, a command of F37FH is a test command that is received last in a combination of a plurality of test commands to be received, regardless of which processing is to be executed. In this way, the test command received last in the combination of test commands received to perform a particular inspection process is the last test command received in the combination of test commands received to perform another inspection process. It may be a command common to the received test command. Note that the first test command received in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a unique command. The part test command may be a unique command. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the last received test command in a combination of a plurality of test commands is a common command. The test command for each unit may be a common command. A combination of a plurality of test commands received for executing the inspection process may be configured as a combination of a larger number of commands than the game effect control commands received as the game progresses. In this case, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic parts is not executed with the number of effect control commands received for the game. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection processing for inspecting the state of the electronic parts from being erroneously executed based on the performance control command for the game received as the game progresses, and to carry out an appropriate inspection. can be done. In addition, for example, since it reduces the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed while the game is in progress, it prevents troubles caused by misunderstanding that the gaming machine has been damaged due to the erroneous execution of the inspection process. It is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by an interruption and improve the reliability of inspection processing. As a combination of multiple test commands, there are multiple types of orders for receiving the test commands. As inspection processing, such as external RAM check (short) processing, external RAM check (long) processing, and backup inspection processing, different processing can be executed according to the type of order in which combinations of a plurality of test commands are received. . Also, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component differs depending on the combination of the plurality of test commands. As a result, various inspection processes for inspecting the state of electronic components can be executed, and appropriate inspection can be performed.

In the effect control backup process executed in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a preset backup condition has been established. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is met, a backup process is executed for storing and storing the data to be backed up according to the backup condition that has been met. As for the backup condition, a plurality of different conditions may be set according to occurrence of events including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . A backup control table indicating a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (such as a program management area) provided in one or both of the external ROM 121 and internal ROM 132, for example. The data to be backed up may include different data depending on the backup conditions. Alternatively, the backup target data may include data common to multiple backup conditions. Data to be backed up indicating log information including date and time information may be stored when any of the backup conditions are met. A batch backup and a divided backup may be prepared as backup methods for storing data to be backed up. In the case of batch backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of split backup, data to be backed up by one backup is stored in interrupt processing based on multiple occurrences of timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the data to be backed up according to the backup conditions is performed each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, and when the backup conditions are met in the effect control backup process of step S79. It may be executable, or may be collectively executable when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the backup process is collectively executed at the time of power failure, when it is determined that the backup condition is met in the backup process during effect control, for example, a backup showing the log information including the date and time information is stored in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122. Store target data.

FIG. 13 shows a setting example of the backup control table 120T that provides a plurality of backup conditions and the like. The backup control table 120T is configured to be able to set backup conditions, backup method, division method, number of storage area bits, multiplicity, and verification method for each data to be backed up indicating the content of log information. When the backup method is split backup, it is possible to specify "automatic", "every 100 KB", etc. as the split method. The division method is a method or technique for dividing the backup target data when performing divided backup, and it is sufficient if the number of times of division and the data volume at the time of division can be specified. For example, when the division method is "automatic", the number of divisions is determined according to the data capacity of the backup target data each time the backup process is executed. Alternatively, depending on the processing load on the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14, the number of divisions and the data capacity at the time of division may be determined. The number of storage area bits is a processing unit of stored data in a log area, which is a storage area for storing log information, in the backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14, and in this example, 8 bits. "8" or "3" indicating 3 bits can be specified. The degree of multiplicity is the degree of mirroring in which data to be backed up that indicates the same log information is stored in a plurality of different log areas in an overlapping and distributed manner. You can specify the number of times. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", the data to be backed up indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once without performing mirroring. When the multiplicity is "2", mirroring is performed with the number of times of storage being two, and backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas and backed up. When the multiplicity is "3", mirroring is performed with a storage count of 3, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored 3 times in different storage areas and backed up. By increasing the degree of multiplicity, redundancy (availability) can be improved and the reliability of stored data can be enhanced.

The verification method that can be set for each data to be backed up is a method to verify whether or not the backup processing, which is the storage processing of the data to be backed up, was performed correctly. It is possible. If the verification method is error detection, when the data to be backed up is read from the log area, arbitrary error detection processing using parity, checksum, hash value, etc. is executed to verify the correctness of the stored data. I wish I could. If the verification method is error detection and majority vote, along with error detection processing using parity, checksum, hash value, etc., in multiple log areas where backup target data that is multiplexed by mirroring and shows the same log information is stored Compare stored data. As a result of this comparison, if the stored contents match in a predetermined number of log areas out of the plurality of log areas, it is determined that the backup processing has been correctly performed, and the correctness of the stored data can be verified. For example, if parity, checksum, or hash values calculated from stored data in multiple log areas match, it can be determined that backup processing has been correctly performed for each log area. If the parity, checksum or hash value calculated from the stored data in multiple log areas do not match, if the number of log areas for which the same parity, checksum or hash value is calculated is more than half, It is sufficient to judge that the backup process has been correctly performed for the log area (judgment by majority vote). The "predetermined number of log areas", which is the condition for judging that the backup process has been performed correctly, is not limited to the majority of the log areas, and is a preset fixed value (for example, "2") regardless of multiplicity. Alternatively, it may be a variable value determined according to the degree of multiplicity, backup method, division method, or the like. Instead of making a decision based on a majority vote, it may be determined that the backup process has been correctly performed when the execution result of the error detection process becomes normal for the first time.

Data to be backed up includes system data, effect control error data, player history data, received command data, set value change time data, power saving setting data, current time change data, power off time data, store name setting data, effect output amount. data, including production history data. It should be noted that the data to be backed up may include some of these. System data should just contain the data for production|presentation control memorize|stored in the predetermined area|region (data holding area for production|presentation control etc.) provided in external RAM122 or internal RAM133. Production control error data is data indicating an error that occurred during execution of production control. The player history data is data relating to the player acquired by the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The received command data is data indicating the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 . The set value change time data is data indicating the date and time when the set value was changed. The setting value change time data may include data indicating the date and time when the setting value was confirmed, or the setting value confirmation time data may be generated separately from the setting value change time data. The power saving setting data is data related to power saving control that can be set by the staff of the game arcade. The setting of the power saving control can be performed, for example, by rotating the knob of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and when the power saving function setting screen is displayed on the image display device 5, the power saving is performed. It is sufficient if the presence/absence and type (power saving mode) of the function can be changed. Alternatively, when a test command for power saving setting is input, a power saving function setting screen may be displayed on the image display device 5 so that the presence or absence of the power saving function and the function (power saving mode) can be changed. The current time change data is data indicating that the setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC has been changed. The setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC may be one or both of the setting of the RTC provided in the timer circuit 135 of the performance control microcomputer 120 and the setting of the RTC 201 provided on the backup memory board 14. Just do it. The power-off time data is data indicating the date and time when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The store name setting data is data indicating the setting of a store name that can be set by a game hall staff member or the like. The performance output amount data is data indicating the setting of the output amount such as the sound volume and the light emission amount that can be set by the player or the like. The effect history data is data indicating the history of effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, the number of rotations indicating the number of times the variable display is executed counted from a specific timing, the number of types of jackpots indicating the number of jackpots counted for each type of jackpot, the number of consecutive wins indicating the number of jackpots that occurred without being controlled in the normal state, the player Arbitrary information according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 and the progress of control, such as the character selection content of the effect image set by , effect customization indicating the effect theme, and mission achievement status indicating the achievement status of the predetermined mission It suffices if the data indicating is capable of being stored as backup target data.

The backup conditions that can be set for each data to be backed up may be conditions for events such as setting, control, determination, and detection in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can occur as a game or performance progresses. In the production control backup process executed in step S79 of the production control timer interrupt process, for example, the CPU131 and VDP140 of the production control microcomputer 120, according to the processing results by the control device and the processing device, was set in advance It suffices to determine whether any of the backup conditions are met. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S75, by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 11, or by determining various detection results, the production device If an error related to the included electronic components occurs, control is performed to report the error. In this case, in the effect control backup process, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is established, and effect control error data is created. In this way, when it is determined that the backup condition is established in the backup process during effect control, a control signal corresponding to the backup command for backup during effect control is transmitted to the backup memory board 14 . The backup command for backup during effect control should just contain backup object data. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives a backup command for backup during effect control, the date and time information acquired from the RTC 201 may be used to write log information including data to be backed up. Storing error information about electronic components including the effect device facilitates identification of defects and improvement of performance.

The effect control backup process is executed in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt. Then, as a case where an event occurrence condition corresponding to a processing result by a control device or a processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 is met, a case where a backup condition set for each backup target data relating to a plurality of electronic components including an effect device is met is met. , a backup process for storing the data to be backed up is executed. In this way, when an event occurrence condition regarding a plurality of electronic components is met, when an event occurrence condition corresponding to the processing result of a control device or a processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 is met, a log area or the like is stored. A write process for writing and storing information about a plurality of electronic components can be performed on the area.

The backup conditions that can be set for each data to be backed up may include write conditions that differ from event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. For example, for player history data, a backup condition is satisfied when data relating to a player is updated, regardless of whether or not events corresponding to a plurality of electronic components have occurred. As for the received command data, a backup condition may be established when the performance control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received even when an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components does not occur. The store name setting data satisfies a backup condition when setting the name of the store corresponding to the game arcade, regardless of whether or not events corresponding to the plurality of electronic components have occurred. The system data is stored regardless of whether or not the backup condition is met when the data is updated due to the occurrence of events related to multiple electronic components, and whether or not events related to multiple electronic components have occurred. In some cases, the backup condition is satisfied at the time of data update. In this way, backup processing for storing data to be backed up is executed even when a backup condition is satisfied as a write condition that is different from an event occurrence condition corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. When a write condition different from such an occurrence condition is met, a write process for writing and storing game-related information different from information on a plurality of electronic components in a storage area such as a log area. can be executed. In the event that an event occurs due to the malfunction of the electronic parts, the backup data including the game-related information is stored, so that it is possible to easily identify the relationship between the progress of the game or performance and the malfunction of the electronic parts. Therefore, the situation of the pachinko game machine 1 can be easily grasped.

When the data to be backed up is the effect control error data, the backup condition is not limited to the backup condition only when an error occurs, and the backup condition including the error recovery may be set. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S75, by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 11, or by determining various detection results, the production device If an error related to the included electronic components occurs, control is performed to notify the error. In this case, in the effect control backup process, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is established, and effect control error data is created. After that, when the error is no longer detected for the electronic component subject to the error notification, it is determined that the error has been recovered. At the time of error recovery by such determination, it may be determined that the backup condition is established in the backup process during effect control, and effect control error recovery data may be created. The performance control error recovery data created in this manner is included in a backup command for backup during performance control and transmitted to the backup memory board 14 in the same manner as the performance control error data. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives a backup command for backup during effect control, the date and time information acquired from the RTC 201 may be used to write log information including data to be backed up. In addition to performance control error data, performance control error recovery data can also be stored as backup data, thereby storing the history of error occurrence and recovery related to performance control to enable post facto verification, and the pachinko game machine 1. status can be easily grasped.

In the power-on information processing in step S23 of the effect control main process, a backup restoration process for restoring settings and controls based on the log information stored in the log area may be executed. In the backup recovery process, verification may be performed using a verification method according to the data to be backed up, and it may be determined whether or not the stored data is normal. For example, if the verification method is error detection and majority vote, if the execution result of error detection processing is normal in a predetermined number of log areas among a plurality of log areas in which data to be backed up showing the same log information is stored, It is determined that the stored data is normal. Thus, if the stored data is normal, data recovery processing is performed using the stored data in the log area. On the other hand, if the stored data is not normal, initial value setting is performed using initial data different from the stored data in the log area. The initial data is stored in one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, for example, and may be data used when the initialization process is executed in step S21 of the game control main process. As a result, even if the data to be backed up cannot be stored correctly, the initial value setting using the initial data can be performed in response to the recovery from the power failure. Special data corresponding to the case where the stored data is not normal may be used instead of the initial data. Different from the initial data, the special data may be any data suitable for restoring settings and control. Whether to use the initial data or the special data may be differentiated according to the data to be backed up whose stored data is determined to be abnormal. For example, if the data to be backed up is system data, data recovery using special data is performed when it is determined that the stored data is not normal. On the other hand, if the data to be backed up is the effect output amount data, the data recovery using the initial data is performed when it is determined that the stored data is not normal. Whether to use the initial data or the special data is set in advance based on the update frequency of the backup target data, the update data amount, the importance of the data, the target parts, the target control, and a combination of some or all of these. It should be decided. It should be noted that the backup recovery process may be made executable when the preset data recovery condition is established in the backup process during effect control. The data recovery condition may be established, for example, when a power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received.

In the effect control backup process, it may be determined whether or not the backup memory board 14 is connected to the effect control board 12 . In this case, the voltage value at terminal TM02 of connector 154 may be determined. Depending on the determination result of the connection state, whether or not to execute the storage process may be changed, and the storage process with different contents may be executed. For example, when the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the performance control board 12, the storage process of storing the log information in the log area is not executed. In this manner, a limitation may be provided as a limit that the memory processing is not executed in the range where the preset limitation condition that the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the performance control board 12 is established. On the other hand, as long as the memory processing can be executed in a range where the restriction condition that the backup memory board 14 is connected to the effect control board 12 is not established. As storage processing of different contents, when the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the effect control board 12, a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 is used as a log area to store and store backup data showing various log information. Processing may be performed. In this case, compared to the case where the backup memory board 14 is connected to the performance control board 12, the data capacity to be stored as the backup target data may be reduced. For example, performance control error data and received command data are data to be backed up, and when a backup condition is met, a storage process is executed to store log information. On the other hand, system data and player history data are not data to be backed up. Instead, the storage process for storing the log information may not be executed even if the backup condition is satisfied. In this way, in the range where the preset limit condition that the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the effect control board 12 is satisfied, a limit is provided as a limit to reduce the data capacity to be stored by the storage process. may On the other hand, in the range where the limiting condition that the backup memory board 14 is connected to the performance control board 12 is not established, the data capacity to be stored by the storage processing is not reduced, and the backup corresponding to all the backup conditions is performed. It is sufficient to store and store the target data. It is not limited to memory processing, and any processing or control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be limited as a limit that a specific processing or control is not executed within a range where a preset limit condition is satisfied. Alternatively, a limit may be provided as a limit such that the amount of processing or the amount of control is reduced compared to a range in which the limit condition is not established.

14 and 15 show specific examples of displaying the maintenance history screen. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step S5 of the game control main process, and when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the main board 11 sets the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. When this setting confirmation start command is received, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 is, for example, when the maintenance mode process is executed in step S78 of the effect control timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. display during confirmation of settings. For the display during setting confirmation, for example, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Setting confirmation is in progress". The setting-confirming display includes a character display such as "Press the push button to shift to maintenance mode" on the image display device 5. FIG. In this manner, in the setting confirmation display, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is performed. At this time, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B by the staff of the game arcade or the person in charge of the manufacturer is detected, the image display device 5 displays a maintenance mode menu screen as shown in FIG. Move to maintenance mode. The maintenance mode menu screen displays options of "maintenance history", "setting change/confirmation history", and "current time setting", as well as the current time.

When the option 012IW106 of "maintenance history" is selected on the maintenance mode menu screen, the image display device 5 switches to display a maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 14(C). On the maintenance history screen, date and time and log contents are displayed in association with each other, and are displayed in order so that the latest log information is at the top. Examples include a VDP error indicating that an internal state abnormality has occurred in the VDP 140, an illegal winning error indicating detection of an illegal winning to a winning opening such as the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening, and a count switch. Each log information of switch abnormality error indicating that abnormality of various switches such as 23 was detected, prize ball abnormality error indicating that prize ball abnormality was detected, magnet error indicating that abnormal magnetism was detected, furthermore, probability change not established Log information is displayed indicating that the When the maintenance history screen has a plurality of pages, performing a selection operation for the next page moves to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 14(D). In this case, log information of the start of setting change and end of setting change, log information of power failure date and time, power on date and time, and log information of left driving notification and full tank notification are displayed. Further, if there is a next page, performing a selection operation for the next page moves to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15(E). At this time, log information indicating the start and end of setting confirmation, log information indicating that the current time was set during maintenance mode during setting confirmation, and log information indicating that the RAM was cleared by initialization processing. Information is displayed. Further, when the next page selection operation is performed, the screen moves to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15(F). Here, the log information of the RWM abnormality error indicating that some RAM abnormality occurred when the pachinko game machine 1 was turned on, and the log information of the date and time of power failure corresponding to the later date and time and the date and time of power-on are displayed. . Based on these log information, an RWM abnormal error occurred, so the staff of the game hall temporarily stopped the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1, then turned on the power again while turning on the clear switch. It is possible to confirm after the fact that the RAM has been cleared. In addition, log information of the CPU exception event indicating that the exception event has occurred in the CPU 131, and log information of the date and time of the power failure and the power-on date and time corresponding to the later date and time are displayed. Since a CPU exception event occurred according to these log information, the game hall staff stopped the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1, but when the power was turned on the next day, the CPU exception event did not occur anymore. This can be confirmed after the fact.

Note that on the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15E, the log information indicating that the current time has been set indicates an earlier time than the log information indicating that the setting confirmation has started. Log information is displayed. For example, the setting check was started at 09:36:28 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, and the current time was set at 09:36 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018: 16. The reason why the date and time are inconsistent before and after setting the current time is that when the current time is set, the date and time information after setting is read and the log information is recorded. In this example, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information was generated, and the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information was generated even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time is set.

In addition to displaying the maintenance history screen, or instead of displaying the maintenance history screen, a two-dimensional barcode may be displayed on the image display device 5 to enable acquisition of log information. For example, a photographing device connected to the inspection device is used to photograph the two-dimensional barcode displayed on the image display device 5 . By photographing such a two-dimensional barcode, log information can be provided to the inspection apparatus. In addition, log information may be output using any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of these. Any information output, not limited to log information, may use any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of all or part of these. I wish I had.

The log information that can be displayed on the maintenance history screen may be all of the log information shown in the backup data, or may be part of the log information shown in the backup data. For example, on the maintenance history screen, it is possible to display log information corresponding to conditions for occurrence of events that can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as exceptional events of the CPU 131 . Also, on the maintenance history screen, it is possible to display log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events that can be established according to the internal state of the processing device, such as an error interrupt request of the VDP 140 . On the maintenance history screen, it is possible to display log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of specific events that can be established according to the processing results of the CPU 131, such as when an error occurs in the backup process during the effect control, when the time is changed, and when the power is turned on again. is. On the other hand, the maintenance history screen displays log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events other than specific events, such as when player history data is updated during backup processing during performance control, when power saving is set, and when decisions are made when setting names. do not. In this way, log information stored as backup data may include log information that is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, log information that is not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen but can be displayed on the special maintenance history screen may be provided. The special maintenance screen may be displayed according to an arbitrary detection result, such as a detection result of an action that becomes a predetermined operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In this case, the operation procedures for the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B are not notified to the staff of the game hall, and may be recognized by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. A special maintenance history screen may be displayed according to arbitrary control and processing without being limited to the detection result. In this manner, a limit may be set such that a specific type of log information among multiple types of log information is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. In the range of log information other than specific types, it is sufficient if it can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, in the range of specific types of log information among multiple types of log information, a limit may be set such that the log information can only be displayed on a special maintenance history screen and not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen.

FIG. 16 shows a specific example of a case where a setting change/confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode. 16(B) in response to the detection of the action of pressing the push button 31B by the game hall staff or manufacturer's person in charge while the setting confirmation display as shown in FIG. 16(A) is being performed. The maintenance mode menu screen as shown in is displayed. Then, the option 012IW107 of "setting change/confirmation history" is selected. In this case, the image display device 5 switches to display a setting change/confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. 16(C). On the setting change/confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether it is a setting change or a setting confirmation, and the setting value after change or the setting value that has been confirmed are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed at the top. displayed in order. It should be noted that when the option of "current time setting" is selected while the maintenance mode menu screen is being displayed, the image display device 5 switches to display the current time setting screen. On the current time setting screen, tilting the stick controller 31A left or right selects items such as year, month, date, day of the week, hour, minute, or second, and tilting the stick controller 31A forward or backward selects a number for each item. be done. After the current time setting screen is displayed, the current date and time is set to the date and time currently being displayed when the staff of the game arcade or the person in charge of the manufacturer presses the push button 31B.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 41AK)
FIG. 17 shows an execution example of the backup process for the characteristic portion 41AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, so that the memory write processing unit 41AKM10 and the event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23 It has functions. A predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 is provided with a writing flag 41AKF1 and a backup data buffer 41AKB1. The backup data buffer 41AKB1 has a plurality of buffer areas including buffer areas 41AKB11 to 41AKB13. The backup data memories 210A to 210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The backup storage unit 41AKA1 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13 as log areas. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23 as log areas. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33 as log areas.

The event information creation processing unit 41AKM21 creates backup data indicating event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 41AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exception backup process in step S42 of the CPU exception event occurrence process. good. The event information creation processing unit 41AKM22 creates backup data indicating event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S52 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Just do it. Occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the effect control error determination 41AKC3. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process during control of the effect in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, and data indicating the log information including the effect control error data. If it is The backup data created by the event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23 are temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 according to the order of creation. For example, the first created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB11, the next created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB12, and the subsequently created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB13. stored as

If there is backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1, the memory write processing unit 41AKM10 reads and acquires it. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this execution example, corresponding to multiplicity "3", the same backup data is distributed and stored redundantly in the three backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. For example, the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is stored in the backup storage area 41AKA11 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA21 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA31 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. is stored by copying and writing to . At the start of writing the backup data to the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3, the writing flag 41AKF1 is set to ON state. At the end of writing the backup data, the write-in-progress flag 41AKF1 is cleared and turned off. When the writing flag 41AKF1 is off, the memory write processing unit 41AKM10 is permitted to write new backup data, and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1. On the other hand, when the write-in-progress flag 41AKF1 is ON, the writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is not read.

For example, when the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is written to the log area and the write flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB12 can be read. The backup data read and acquired at this time is copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA12 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area AKA22 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA32 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. remembered. When writing to the log area is thus completed and the write flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB13 can be read. In this case, the backup data read out and acquired is copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA13 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA23 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA33 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. is stored in

The backup storage unit 41AKA1 is provided as one continuous storage area by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13, for example. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 is provided as one continuous storage area by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23, for example. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 is provided as one continuous storage area by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33, for example. When the write-in-progress flag 41AKF1 is ON, writing of new backup data is prohibited. As a result, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, if the backup data write process corresponding to one of the conditions is being executed, , the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition is not executed.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are met, if the backup data write process corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is being executed, the write flag 41AKF1 must be on. , the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is not executed. Alternatively, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are met, if the backup data write processing corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is being executed, the write flag 41AKF1 is turned on. In response to this, the write processing of the backup data corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is not executed. Which write process should be executed first may be determined according to the order of creation of the backup data. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error determination 41AKC3 are met, and when the conditions for the effect control error determination 41AKC3 and the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are met, the writing process is similarly executed. You can control it. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are met, there is a limit that backup data write processing corresponding to one condition is not executed while backup data write processing corresponding to one condition is being executed. As a limit is set. As long as the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, it is sufficient that the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

In addition, the order of creation when creating backup data may be determined according to the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120 . For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are met, the CPU exception event processing has a higher priority than the VDP error interrupt processing. The creation of backup data by 41AKM21 may be executed prior to the creation of backup data by the event information creation processing unit 41AKM22. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error determination 41AKC3 are met, the priority of the VDP error interrupt process is higher than the priority of the timer interrupt process for effect control, so the generated event information is created. The creation of backup data by the processing unit 41AKM22 may be executed prior to the creation of the backup data by the event information creation processing unit 41AKM23.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as an exception event of the CPU 131 . The condition for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 can be established according to the internal state of the processor, such as the VDP 140 error interrupt request. The occurrence condition of the effect control error determination 41AKC3 can be established according to the processing result by the CPU 131, such as the determination when an error occurs in the effect control backup process. Therefore, when the CPU internal error 41AKC1 or the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 generation condition is satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the effect control error determination 41AKC3 generation condition is satisfied. become.

For example, if the condition for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is satisfied multiple times, the backup data is created in the order in which the conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data was created. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are met multiple times, backup data is created in the order in which the conditions are met, and write processing can be executed in the order in which the backup data are created. When the generation condition of the effect control error determination 41AKC3 is met a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of backup data creation. In these cases, writing is prohibited when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON, so that if the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed, the writing corresponding to the next occurrence condition is prohibited. Do not perform load processing. In this way, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components is met a plurality of times, the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, there is a limit that write processing corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As long as the write process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is not being executed, the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition may be executed.

It should be noted that, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any write process may be determined according to the order in which the occurrence conditions are satisfied. For example, if another occurrence condition is met during the execution of the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met earlier, the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met later may not be executed. Alternatively, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any write process may be determined according to the process priority. For example, if the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 generation conditions are satisfied at the same time, the CPU internal The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 may not be executed. Further, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are met, overwrite processing may be executed according to the processing priority. For example, if the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 generation conditions are satisfied at the same time, the CPU internal The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed as an overwrite process for overwriting the stored data by the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2.

When a plurality of backup conditions are met as a plurality of occurrence conditions, the order of creating backup data and whether or not to execute write processing may be determined according to the contents of the data to be backed up. For example, if the backup condition for when an error occurs that the data to be backed up is effect control error data and the backup condition for when a command is received that the data to be backed up is received command data are satisfied at the same time, the backup condition for when an error occurs The write process corresponding to the command may be executed first, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of command reception may be executed later. Alternatively, the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when an error occurs may be executed, and the writing process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the failure of the electronic parts including the effect device is preferentially stored, the possibility that the failure of the electronic parts can be dealt with appropriately is increased. Alternatively, the writing process corresponding to the backup conditions at the time of command reception may be executed first, and the writing process corresponding to the backup conditions at the time of error occurrence may be executed later. Alternatively, the write process corresponding to the backup conditions when the command is received may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the backup conditions when an error occurs may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the reception status of the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is preferentially stored, the possibility of being able to appropriately deal with the control problems related to the game is increased.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 42AK)
FIG. 18 shows an execution example of backup processing for the characteristic portion 42AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, so that the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13, the occurrence event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to It has the function of 42AKM23. The backup data memories 210A-210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with backup storage units 42AKA11-42AKA13, backup storage units 42AKA21-42AKA23, and backup storage units 42AKA31-42AKA33. The backup storage unit 42AKA11 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA12 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA13 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA21 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA211 to 42AKA213 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA22 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA23 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA31 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA32 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA33 has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333 as log areas.

The event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data indicating event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exception backup process in step S42 of the CPU exception event occurrence process. good. The event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 creates backup data indicating event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S52 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Just do it. Occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23 creates backup data indicating occurrence event information corresponding to occurrence of error determination 42AKC3 during effect control. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process during control of the effect in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, and data indicating the log information including the effect control error data. If it is The backup data created by the event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to 42AKM23 can be stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3 in parallel with each other.

The memory write processing unit 42AKM11 acquires backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory write processing unit 42AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory write processing unit 42AKM13 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM23. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3.

This execution example also corresponds to the multiplicity of "3". In the three backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, the same backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 are stored in a distributed manner while overlapping. In the three backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, the same backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 are stored in a distributed manner while overlapping. In the three backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33, the same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKA23 are stored in an overlapping and distributed manner. For example, the backup data first acquired from the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA111 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA121 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA131 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. , is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 are stored in the backup storage area 42AKA112 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA122 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA132 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data obtained next from the event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 are the backup storage area 42AKA113 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA123 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA133 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. is stored by copying and writing to .

In the backup storage units 42AKA11-42AKA13 and the backup storage units 42AKA21-42AKA23, for example, different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas 42AKA111-42AKA113 and the backup storage areas 42AKA211-42AKA213. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA131 to 42AKA133 and the backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233, thereby providing different storage areas. In the backup storage areas 42AKA21 to 42AKA23 and the backup storage sections 42AKA31 to 42AKA33, for example, different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas 42AKA211 to 42AKA213 and the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA231 to 42AKA233 and the backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333, thereby providing different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA31-42AKA33 and the backup storage units 42AKA11-42AKA13, for example, different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas 42AKA311-42AKA313 and the backup storage areas 42AKA111-42AKA113. Different addresses are assigned to the storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123, and different addresses are assigned to the backup storage areas AKA331 to 42AKA333 and the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133, thereby providing different storage areas. Note that different storage areas may be provided by using physically different storage devices. The memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can perform write processing of backup data in parallel with each other. Accordingly, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components, even while the backup data write process corresponding to one condition is being executed, the other event occurrence condition It is possible to execute write processing of backup data corresponding to the conditions.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied, even if the memory write processing unit 42AKM11 is executing the backup data write processing corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC1, the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 can execute backup data write processing corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 are satisfied, the memory write processing is performed even when the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 is executing the backup data write processing corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The part 42AKM13 can execute the writing process of the backup data corresponding to the effect control error determination 42AKC3. When the condition for generating the effect control error determination 42AKC3 and the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is met, the memory write process is performed even while the memory write processing unit 42AKM13 is executing the write process of the backup data corresponding to the effect control error determination 42AKC3. The unit 42AKM11 can execute write processing of backup data corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are met, even if backup data write processing corresponding to one condition is being executed, backup data write processing corresponding to the other condition can be executed. I wish I could. As long as the backup data write process corresponding to one of the conditions is not being executed, the backup data write process corresponding to the other condition may of course be executed.

The conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as an exception event of the CPU 131 . The condition for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 can be established according to the internal state of the processor, such as the VDP 140 error interrupt request. The occurrence condition of the effect control error determination 42AKC3 can be established according to the processing result by the CPU 131, such as the determination when an error occurs in the effect control backup process. Therefore, when the CPU internal error 42AKC1 or VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 occurrence conditions are satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the effect control error determination 42AKC3 occurrence conditions are satisfied. can be For example, when the backup data is created, the creation order is determined according to the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120, so that the backup data write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 is also performed in the order of creation. It may be executed with priority accordingly.

FIG. 19 shows an execution example different from the case of FIG. 18 for the backup processing regarding the characteristic part 42AK. In this execution example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are met multiple times, the backup data is created in the order in which the conditions are met, and the write process can be executed in the order in which the backup data were created. . In this case, a predetermined area of external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133 is provided with a writing flag 42AKF1 and a backup data buffer 42AKB1. The backup data buffer 42AKB1 has a plurality of buffer areas including buffer areas 42AKB11 to 42AKB13. The event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data in the order in which the CPU internal errors 42AKC1 have occurred. For example, when the occurrence conditions for the CPU internal errors X1 to Xn corresponding to n times are satisfied as the CPU internal error 42AKC1 multiple times, the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 generates the backup data Y1 corresponding to the occurrence conditions for each time. ˜Yn and temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. For example, the first created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB11, the next created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB12, and the subsequently created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB13. stored as If there is backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1, the memory write processing unit 42AKM11 reads and acquires it. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. At the start of writing backup data to the log area, the writing flag 42AKF1 is set to ON. At the end of writing the backup data, the write-in-progress flag 42AKF1 is cleared and turned off. When the writing flag 42AKF1 is off, the memory write processing unit 42AKM11 is permitted to write new backup data, and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. On the other hand, when the write flag 42AKF1 is ON, the writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1 is not read.

Even if the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are met multiple times, the backup data is created in the order in which the conditions are met, and the write process can be executed in the order in which the backup data are created. Even when the generation conditions of the effect control error determination 42AKC3 are met a plurality of times, the creation of the backup data is executed in the order in which those occurrence conditions are met, and the writing process can be executed in the order of the creation of the backup data. . In these cases, writing is prohibited when the writing flag provided corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 is ON, so that the previous occurrence condition is met. If the writing process is being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next generation condition is not executed. In this way, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components is met a plurality of times, the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, there is a limit that write processing corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As long as the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is not being executed, the writing process corresponding to the next occurrence condition may be executed.

It should be noted that, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any write process may be determined according to the order in which the occurrence conditions are satisfied. For example, if another occurrence condition is met during the execution of the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met earlier, the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is met later may not be executed. Alternatively, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any write process may be determined according to the process priority. For example, among the exceptional events of the CPU 131, an exceptional event with a high processing priority and an exceptional event with a low processing priority may be set in advance. When the condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is met multiple times at the same time, the write processing corresponding to the exception event with high processing priority is executed, and the write processing corresponding to the exception event with low processing priority is executed. It may not be executed. Further, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are met, overwrite processing may be executed according to the processing priority. For example, when the condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is satisfied multiple times at the same time, the write processing corresponding to the exception event with high processing priority will replace the stored data by the write processing corresponding to the exception event with low processing priority. It may be executed as an overwriting process for overwriting.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 43AK)
FIG. 20 shows an execution example of backup processing for the characteristic portion 43AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, so that the functions of the memory write processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the event information creation process and the functions of parts 43AKM21 and 43AKM22. The backup data memories 210A to 210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 and a backup storage unit 43AKA21. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA111 to 43AKA113 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA12 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA13 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA131 to 43AKA133 as log areas. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 is a 3-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA211 to 43AKA213 as log areas. The 8-bit storage area is a storage area in which storage data can be written and read in units of 8 bits. The 3-bit storage area is a storage area in which storage data can be written and read in 3-bit units.

Occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to a case where a backup condition of a storage area bit number of "8" and a multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory write processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. In the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas, the same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are stored in an overlapping and distributed manner. For example, the backup data first acquired from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , is stored by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 are the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. is stored by copying and writing to .

Occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the number of storage area bits being "3" and the multiplicity being "1" is satisfied. The memory write processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. In the backup storage unit 43AKA21, which is a 3-bit storage area, the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored in a smaller storage area than the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. stored in the area. Specifically, corresponding to the number of bits of the storage area of "3", a 3-bit storage area is used which is storage data in units of 3 bits, which is smaller than the 8-bit unit of the 8-bit storage area. Also, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed and single backup data is stored without distribution. For example, the backup data first obtained from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The next backup data acquired from the event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by writing it to the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

In the backup control table 120T, when the data to be backed up is system data, performance control error data, player history data, received command data, or setting value change time data, the number of storage area bits is "8". The severity is designated as "3". On the other hand, in the case of any one of power saving setting data, current time change data, power cut time data, store name setting data, effect output amount data, the number of storage area bits is "3" and the multiplicity is "1". is set to For example, when the backup condition corresponding to the system data is satisfied for the data to be backed up, the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is stored in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM11. It is written and stored in the log area. On the other hand, when the backup condition corresponding to the power saving setting data is satisfied, the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored in the backup storage unit 43AKA21 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM12. It is written and stored in the log area. Thus, when writing the first information corresponding to the first occurrence condition, the same backup data is stored in a plurality of log areas in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. On the other hand, when writing the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition, the backup data is stored in a small log area in the backup storage unit 43AKA21.

For example, the occurrence condition at power saving change where backup target data is a backup condition corresponding to power saving setting data is met less frequently than the occurrence condition at data update where backup target data is a backup condition corresponding to system data. In this way, the second occurrence condition may be any condition as long as it is met less frequently than the first occurrence condition. An event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is frequently established affects the storage of log information related to other events when log information cannot be stored properly, such as when noise occurs during writing processing. likely to give An event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is met less frequently is less likely to affect the storage of log information related to other events than an event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is met more frequently. Therefore, when writing log information corresponding to an occurrence condition that is frequently established, the same backup data is stored in a plurality of log areas, thereby preventing problems caused by abnormalities in stored data from spreading. On the other hand, when writing log information corresponding to an occurrence condition with a low frequency of occurrence, an increase in the storage data capacity can be prevented by storing backup data in a small log area.

The power-saving setting data can be set by an administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as an attendant of a game arcade, for example. Thus, the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition may be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Data that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko game machine 1 can be set again by the administrator even if a problem occurs in the setting contents, and there is no possibility of giving disadvantage to the player of the pachinko game machine 1. low. On the other hand, for example, it is impossible or difficult to reset data corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events that occur according to the progress of a game or performance, and there is a high possibility that the player will be disadvantaged or distrusted. It shows information about Therefore, when writing log information corresponding to occurrence conditions that cannot be set by the administrator of the pachinko game machine 1, by storing the same backup data in a plurality of log areas, it is possible to accurately verify when an abnormality occurs. sexuality is enhanced. On the other hand, when writing log information corresponding to generation conditions that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the storage data capacity can be prevented from increasing by storing backup data in a small log area. The information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to the information indicated in the power saving setting data, but also the RTC information indicated in the current time change data, the shop name information indicated in the shop name setting data, It may be information on the sound volume or the amount of light indicated by the effect output amount data, or a combination of some or all of these. In addition, when a projector is used as an effect device, information on display settings by the projector may be included in the information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . It should be noted that the information of the display setting by the projector can be set by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, unlike the person in charge of the game hall. In this way, the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include the staff of the game hall, or may include the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include setting information related to the frequency of performance using a specific performance device, not limited to the projector.

In the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas, different backup storage areas may be provided according to the types of log information indicated in the backup data. For example, the backup storage area when the data to be backed up is the received command data may be provided as a storage area different from the backup storage area when the data to be backed up is the effect control error data. Inside or outside the backup storage area corresponding to the effect control error data, a backup storage area corresponding to the occurrence of an exception event of the CPU 131 or an error interrupt request of the VDP 140 may be provided. In this way, when a backup storage area corresponding to the type of log information is provided in the 8-bit storage area, the memory write processing unit 43AKM11 stores the backup storage area determined according to the established backup condition. , the backup data created by the event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 may be written and stored.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 44AK)
FIG. 21 shows a configuration example regarding the characteristic portion 44AK. In this configuration example, a first effect control board 44AK12A and a second effect control board 44AK12B are provided. 1st production control board 44AK12A and 2nd production control board 44AK12B should just have the composition and function which production control board 12 and backup memory board 14 in the above-mentioned example have. 1st control part 44AK10A, 1st backup storage part 44AK11A, and connector 44AK13A are mounted in 1st production|presentation control board 44AK12A. A second control unit 44AK10B, a second backup storage unit 44AK11B, and a connector 44AK13B are mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13A of the first effect control board 44AK12A is connected to the connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B is connected to the connector 44AK11B of the first effect control board 44AK12A. The 1st control part 44AK10A and the 2nd control part 44AK10B should just each have a part or all of the structure and the function with which microcomputer 120 for production control in the above-mentioned example is provided. For example, the 1st control part 44AK10A is provided with the structure and function regarding CPU131 of the microcomputer 120 for production control, and the 2nd control part 44AK10B is provided with the structure and function regarding VDP140 of the microcomputer 120 for production control. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may each have a part or all of the configuration and functions of the backup memory board 14 in the above embodiment. For example, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A has the configuration and functions related to the backup data memories 210A and 210B of the backup memory board 14, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B has the configuration and functions related to the backup data memories 210C and 210D of the backup memory board 14. It has functionality.

In the first effect control board 44AK12A, the first control unit 44AK10A, when having the configuration and functions related to the CPU 131 in the above embodiment, for example, the serial communication circuit 137 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the effect of the effect data memory board 16 A process for controlling the first electronic component, such as a data memory, is executed. In this case, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores backup data indicating log information related to the first control unit 44AK10A. In the second effect control board 44AK12B, the second control unit 44AK10B, when having the configuration and functions related to the VDP 140 in the above embodiment, for example, the sound processing circuit 141 of the effect control microcomputer 120, the lamp control circuit 142, the motor control circuit 143, the image display device 5, and the like to control the second electronic components. In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B stores backup data indicating log information regarding the second control unit 44AK10B. Thus, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can store information about the first control unit 44AK10A, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can store information about the second control unit 44AK10B.

When the first control unit 44AK10A has the configuration and functions related to the CPU 131, the log information including the exception event information of the CPU 131 is stored by executing the exception backup process of step S42 in the CPU exception event occurrence process. It is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When the second control unit 44AK10B has the configuration and functions related to the VDP 140, the log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 140 is executed by performing the error interrupt backup process of step S52 in the VDP error interrupt process. is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this way, when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the exception backup process in the CPU exception event occurrence process is executed. On the other hand, when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, VDP error allocation is performed as a different process from the case where the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. A backup process may be executed when an error interrupt occurs in the load process. In addition, when log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and when log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, arbitrary storage processing different from each other is performed. may

Log information including exceptional event information of the CPU 131 is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information including VDP error information of the VDP 140 is stored as information different from the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Alternatively, the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores log information related to errors occurring in the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, for example. On the other hand, the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B stores, for example, log information related to errors that have occurred in the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may store different log information related to arbitrary electronic components.

Note that the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A may store log information corresponding to the event occurrence conditions related to the first control unit 44AK10A. Log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events related to the second control unit 44AK10B may be stored. The log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may store log information corresponding to the event occurrence conditions related to the second control unit 44AK10B. Log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the part 44AK10A may be stored. If log information is stored in both log areas, even if a storage error occurs in one log area, inspection such as analysis can be performed using the log information stored in the other log area. It becomes possible, and the reliability of the stored data is improved. The configuration and functions related to the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 and the configuration and functions related to the VDP 140 of the production control microcomputer 120 are not limited to dividing into the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B, For example, the configuration and functions related to the CPU 131 of the production control microcomputer 120 may be divided into the first control section 44AK10A and the second control section 44AK10B. Alternatively, the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may be provided for a plurality of CPUs. The first control unit 44AK10A may have a configuration and functions related to a CPU, and the second control unit 44AK10B may have a configuration and functions related to light emission control.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B are substrates different from the first production control board 44AK12A on which the first control unit 44AK10A is mounted and the second production control board 44AK12B on which the second control unit 44AK10B is mounted. , may be mounted on the backup memory board 14, for example. In this case, the log information on the electronic component called the first control unit 44AK10A mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A, and the log information on the electronic component called the second control unit 44AK10B mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B can be stored in the log areas of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B mounted on the common backup memory board 14. FIG. In this way, backup data indicating log information about a plurality of electronic components provided on a plurality of control boards may be stored in a log area of a storage device provided on a common backup memory board. Alternatively, the first backup memory board on which the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is mounted and the second backup memory board on which the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is mounted are combined into the first performance control board 44AK12A and the second performance control board 44AK12B. may be provided as a different substrate.

For example, the storage data capacity of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is 1 MB (megabyte). On the other hand, the storage data capacity of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is 512 KB (kilobytes). In this way, the first backup storage section 44AK11A and the second backup storage section 44AK11B may be configured as different storage devices in that the storage data capacity is different. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is configured using a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark), for example. On the other hand, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is configured using, for example, an SRAM with a battery. When a nonvolatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) is used, stored data can be erased by inputting a specific signal such as a clear signal. When a battery-equipped SRAM is used, stored data can be erased by, for example, removing the battery in addition to inputting a specific signal. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may use different transmission methods for stored data. For example, data stored in the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is transmitted by serial communication, and data stored in the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is transmitted by parallel communication. Combinations of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, and the serial communication method and the parallel communication method can be arbitrarily changed. In this case, as the serial communication method, it is possible to send and receive communication data corresponding to a serial communication standard with a faster communication speed than the parallel communication method, or a serial communication standard with a slower communication speed than the parallel communication method may be used. Corresponding communication data may be transmitted and received. Regardless of the serial communication standard, the transmission speed of stored data may vary depending on the configuration of the data line (whether shared or not), the hardware configuration of the communication circuit, or a combination thereof. As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B differ in the method of realizing the backup function, the difference in the materials used to form the memory cells, the method of erasing the stored data, and the erasure of the stored data. Both storage units may be configured as storage devices that are different from each other in that the transmission method or the transmission speed of stored data is different. In addition, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as different storage devices due to arbitrary differences. Note that the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured to store data capacity, backup function implementation method, memory cell forming material, storage data erasing method, and other arbitrary device configurations and storage functions. A part or all of them may be configured as a common storage device. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can be arbitrarily combined with respect to their configurations and functions.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A can hold stored contents without using a backup power source, such as when configured using FRAM (registered trademark). In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can hold the stored content using a backup power source, such as when configured using an SRAM with a battery. In such a configuration, part or all of the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may also be stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When part of the log information is stored, the target log information is based on the update frequency, update data volume, data importance, target parts, target control, combination of some or all of these, etc. , should be determined in advance. In a storage device capable of retaining stored content using a backup power supply, stored data is erased when the backup power supply is lost. Therefore, by storing data stored in a storage device capable of retaining memory contents using a backup power supply in a storage device capable of retaining memory contents without using a backup power supply, loss of memory data can be reliably prevented. can be prevented.

Whether or not to display on the maintenance history screen depending on whether the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B You may change the setting of either. For example, log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can be displayed on the maintenance history screen, while log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. may be set not to be displayed. Even in this case, if the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is also stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, substantially all log information can be stored. It can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is not read when the maintenance history screen is displayed. are handled differently. When any output is performed without being limited to the display of the maintenance history screen, the setting of whether or not log information is to be read is different between the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. good too. As described above, the log information stored in the log area of either the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is limited to not being read out when outputting. may be restricted. On the other hand, the range of log information stored in the other log area may be read when outputting.

The configuration and functions provided by the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 in the above embodiment are the first effect control board 44AK12A provided with the first control unit 44AK10A and the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the second control unit 44AK10B and the It is realized by a configuration divided into a second effect control board 44AK12B provided with a second backup storage section 44AK11B. In this case, the development of the configuration and functions provided by the first effect control board 44AK12A and the development of the configuration and functions provided by the second effect control board 44AK12B, for example, are shared by separate developers and advanced in parallel. be able to. As a result, the burden of development work can be reduced, and an increase in manufacturing costs can be prevented.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 45AK)
FIG. 22 shows a setting example of an inspection designation command relating to the characteristic portion 45AK. The inspection designation command is included in a plurality of test commands received, for example, when executing backup inspection processing. FIG. 22A shows a setting example 45AK01 of an inspection designation command capable of designating an inspection output unit and a communication method. The output unit for inspection should be able to select and designate a connector to be used as the signal output unit for inspection from among the connectors 152 to 156, for example. The output unit for inspection should be capable of inputting/outputting an inspection signal and outputting a read signal corresponding to backup data. The communication method may be parallel or serial, and in the case of serial, serial communication standards such as UART, SPI, and I2C can be selected and specified. A plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 are prepared in advance as inspection designation commands in the setting example 45AK01. A plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may be different in inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 and communication method designation contents.

The connector 152 is wire-connected to the effect control relay board 17, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the driver circuit mounted on the driver board 19, the effect motor 60, and the effect LED 61, for example. The connector 153 is wire-connected to the lamp output board 13 and is capable of outputting a control signal to an electronic component such as a driver circuit mounted on the lamp output board 13 . The connector 154 is wire-connected to the backup memory board 14, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the RTC 201, the serial communication circuit 202, and the backup data memories 210A to 210D mounted on the backup memory board 14, for example. The connector 155 is wire-connected to the effect data memory board 16 and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as a plurality of effect data memories mounted on the effect data memory board 16, for example. In this way, connectors 152-155 can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components. On the other hand, the connectors 152 to 155 are designated as any one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, so that the backup data read signal indicating the log information read from the log area is supplied. It is possible to output a read signal corresponding to the stored information. Since the connector 156 is wire-connected to the inspection device of the pachinko game machine 1, no control signal for electronic components is output. On the other hand, the connector 156 can output a read signal corresponding to stored information, such as a backup data read signal indicating log information read from the log area. For example, the connector 156 is designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, and becomes an output terminal for a read signal corresponding to the log information.

The inspection output units 45AKC1-45AKC4 that can be designated by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1-45AKA4 may include some of the connectors 152-156 or all of the connectors 152-156. Further, the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 may include a connector common to each other, or may include a connector different from that of the other inspection output units. For example, the effect relay wiring connector 152 can input and output multiple types of control signals and detection signals according to the specifications of various circuits mounted on the effect control relay board 17, the audio output board 18, and the driver board 19. configured and included in the inspection output sections 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. On the other hand, for example, the frame lamp wiring connector 153 is configured to be capable of inputting and outputting parallel signals, and is included in the inspection output section 45AKC1 of the inspection designation command 45AKA1 that designates parallel as the communication method. On the other hand, the connector 153 is not included in the inspection output sections 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA2 to 45AKA4 specifying any of the serial communication standards as the communication method. Further, for example, the connector 154 for backup wiring is configured to be capable of inputting/outputting a signal conforming to the SPI serial communication standard, and the inspection output section 45AKC3 of the inspection designation command 45AKA3 that designates the SPI serial communication standard as the communication method. include. On the other hand, the connector 154 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1, 45AKC2, and 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1, 45AKA2, and 45AKA4 that designate parallel, UART, and I2C serial signal standards as the communication method. As described above, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components are composed of the connector 152 capable of outputting signals according to a plurality of signaling methods and the connectors 153 and 154 capable of outputting signals according to a specific signaling method. may contain Connectors 152 to 156 that can be designated as inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 include connectors 152 to 155 that can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and connectors 152 to 155 that can output control signals for electronic components. and connectors 156 that are not connected. By designating the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 with the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, the signal output units corresponding to the multiple types of received information are selected from a plurality of different signal output units such as the connectors 152 to 156. Then, inspection information corresponding to the inspection signal, such as a backup data readout signal, can be output.

The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 can execute various lottery processes related to the presence or absence of effect and the mode of effect, such as lottery process for advance notice effect. Based on the lottery results of such lottery processing, control signals corresponding to various control information are output. For example, when it is decided to execute a specific advance notice effect as a lottery result of the notice effect, a control signal for reading the pattern data of the notice effect control pattern corresponding to the notice effect is sent to the effect data wiring connector. 155 and transmitted to the performance data memory board 16 via the performance data wiring. In this case, in accordance with the read pattern data of the notice effect control pattern, a control signal (audio signal) for controlling the sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R and a control signal for controlling the drive state of the effect motor 60 (Drive control signal) and the like are output from the connector 152 for effect relay wiring, and are transmitted to the effect control relay board 17 via the effect relay wire. A control signal (electrical signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is output from the frame lamp wiring connector 153 and transmitted to the lamp output board via the frame lamp wiring. On the other hand, the backup wiring connector 154 can output a control signal for electronic components such as the backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14. This control signal is based on the lottery result of the lottery process. It is not output based on Thus, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include connectors 152, 153, 155 capable of outputting control signals based on the lottery results, and a connector 154 different from these. there is

The connectors 152, 153, and 155 need only be capable of outputting control signals based on the lottery results and outputting control signals independent of the lottery results. As an example, when a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, a control signal for controlling the demonstration effect without executing the lottery process is output from the connectors 152, 153, 155 and the like. be. Of these, the connector 152 for effect relay wiring is provided with a control signal (audio signal) for controlling the sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R and a control signal (drive control signal) for controlling the driving state of the effect motor 60. It is possible to output a control signal according to the control information of the speakers 8L and 8R as a performance device, the performance motor 60 and the performance LED 61. The frame lamp wiring connector 153 can output a control signal corresponding to the control information of the game effect lamp 9 as a production device, such as a control signal (electrical decoration signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. be. On the other hand, the effect data wiring connector 155 can output a control signal corresponding to control information of an electronic component different from the effect device, such as a control signal for controlling the reading process of the effect data memory. In addition, the backup wiring connector 154 can output control signals corresponding to control information of electronic components different from the production device, such as control signals for controlling read processing and write processing of the backup data memories 210A to 210D. is. In this way, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components are the connectors 152 and 153 capable of outputting control signals corresponding to the control information of the production device, and the control signals for electronic components other than the production device. and connectors 154 and 155 capable of outputting .

FIG. 22B shows a setting example 45AK02 of an inspection designation command that can designate inspection output data. Some or all of the data stored in the log areas of the backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14 can be selected and designated as the inspection output data as backup data indicating log information. If it is The output data for inspection is outputted from the connectors 152 to 156 designated as any one of the output units for inspection 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. A plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 are prepared in advance as inspection designation commands in the setting example 45AK02. The plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 differ in inspection output data.

The inspection designation command 45AKB1 designates system data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB2 designates the performance control error data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation 45 command AKB3 designates player history data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB4 designates received command data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB5 designates setting change time data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB6 designates power saving setting data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB7 designates the current time setting data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB8 designates power-off time data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB9 designates store name setting data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB10 designates effect output amount data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB11 designates performance history data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB12 designates all stored data as inspection output data.

Backup data that can be output by specifying it as inspection output data may indicate information about a plurality of electronic components or may indicate game-related information about a game. For example, when the production control error data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB2, it becomes possible to output the backup data including the production control error data, and it is possible to specify the error that occurred regarding the electronic parts including the production device. backup data is output.

On the other hand, if the player history data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB3, it becomes possible to output the backup data including the player history data, and whether an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred. Regardless of whether or not the data regarding the player is updated, the backup data at the time of data update is output. When the received command data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB4, the backup data including the received command data can be output, regardless of whether or not events corresponding to a plurality of electronic components have occurred. Backup data at the time of reception of the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is output. When the store name setting data is designated as inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB9, backup data including the store name setting data can be output, regardless of whether or not events corresponding to a plurality of electronic components have occurred. First, the backup data at the time of setting the name of the store corresponding to the game arcade is output. When the system data is designated as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB1, the backup data including the system data can be output. Backup data including system data is stored regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred, and backup data when updating data due to the occurrence of an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. backup data at the time of data update. By outputting backup data at the time of data update for system data, backup data in the event that an event occurs for multiple electronic components, regardless of whether an event occurs for multiple electronic components Backup data at the time of data update is output. In this way, information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information unrelated to electronic parts or games can be output according to the contents of the inspection output data specified by the inspection specification command. . In addition, it is not limited to the specified contents of the inspection output data by the inspection specifying command, and information about the electronic parts and the , game-related information about a game, or general information unrelated to electronic components or games, may be switchable. It is not limited to the detection result, and can switch output information such as information on electronic parts, game-related information on games, or general information unrelated to electronic parts or games according to arbitrary control and processing. I wish I had.

(Regarding deformation and application, etc.)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, some of the features explained in the above embodiment It may be provided with the configuration of.

The pachinko game machine 1 may not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is changed from the closed state (second state) to the open state ( 1 state), and when the game ball that has entered the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) out of a plurality of areas, it is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured as follows.

In the above embodiments, the "ratio" and "probability" of various decisions are 0% (no decision is made) or 100% (always possible), such as 70:30. It may be set so that it will never be decided), or at least the probability of any decision outcome is 0% (never decided) or 100% (always decided). may be set. For example, when making various decisions, if the ratio of any one decision result among multiple decision results is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of 1 decision result is It may include being 100%, or it may include being 0% as a percentage of other determination results. When the ratio of one decision result is 100%, the ratio of other decision results is 0%. Also, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. higher than the ratio of

In addition, various effects including the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation on the image display device, the sound output operation on the speaker, and the lighting operation on the game effect lamp and the performance LED Operations and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of winning, but is a gaming machine that encloses game media and pays points based on the occurrence of winning. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that provides

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko game machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game, such as variable display of symbols that serve as identification information of a plurality of types, and giving a predetermined game value based on the game result. More specifically, By setting a predetermined number of bets (number of medals or number of credits) for one game, the game can be started, and a variable display device ( One game is completed by deriving and displaying the display results of, for example, a plurality of reels, etc.), and prizes are awarded according to the display results (for example, cherry prizes, watermelon prizes, bell prizes, replay prizes, BB prizes, RB prizes, etc.). is a gaming machine that can occur. In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect movable mechanism provided on the front side of the slot machine cooperate with the software that performs the predetermined processing, thereby realizing the pachinko machine shown in the above embodiment. All or part of the features of the gaming machine 1 may be provided.

Slot machines are not limited to those in which the bet amount is set using medals and credits as game value, and slot machines in which the bet amount is set using game balls as game value and credits only as game value. It may also be a full credit slot machine where the bet is set using . When game balls are used as game media, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. Equivalent to setting The pachinko gaming machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls. A game value may be used together. For example, in a slot machine, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. Any of the types of gaming values may be paid out.

Programs and data for realizing the present invention are limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a game machine, such as a pachinko game machine 1 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of a computer device or the like instead of being distributed. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 41AK)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components, for example, control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. and storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D capable of storing information on a plurality of electronic components, and the control means controls events corresponding to the plurality of electronic components. When the occurrence condition is satisfied, as the write processing for writing information to the storage means, for example, the write processing by the memory write processing unit 41AKM10 can be executed, and the storage means includes, for example, backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. A storage area in which first information corresponding to a first occurrence condition is written, such as a backup storage unit 41AKA1, and a storage area in which second information corresponding to a second occurrence condition is written are provided as one continuous area, For example, when a first occurrence condition and a second occurrence condition are met, such as write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is ON, during the execution of the process of writing information corresponding to one of the conditions, the other Do not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the condition. In this manner, while the process of writing information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition is being executed, the process of writing information corresponding to the other condition is not executed, thereby avoiding conflict between the processes of writing information. be. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The occurrence condition may be established according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the control means is established, the writing process is executed to write the information on the electronic parts into the storage means, and the information on the electronic parts including the control means is stored. be able to. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The first occurrence condition, for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc., can be established according to the internal state of the control means, the second occurrence condition, for example, such as effect control error determination 41AKC3, depending on the control means It can be established depending on the processing result, and for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. In this way, when the first occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control means is established, writing is given priority over the case where the second occurrence condition that can be established according to the processing result of the control means is established. If the write process is executed, the priority of the write process is set while avoiding conflict between the write processes of the information on the electronic components. This enables appropriate management of information.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the next condition is set according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition, such as the writing flag 41AKF1, is being executed. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the information writing process is restricted according to such execution information, the process conflict can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The write process may store the same information in a plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. By storing the same information in a plurality of storage areas in this manner, the reliability of the information is enhanced. This enables appropriate management of information.

When a write condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control means writes game-related information different from the information on the plurality of electronic components into the storage means, for example, backup processing according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. etc. may be executable. In this way, if it becomes possible to execute the process of writing game-related information corresponding to write conditions different from the generation conditions, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

For example, output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components and capable of outputting read signals corresponding to information stored in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the readout signal, the complication of the device configuration and the increase in the manufacturing cost can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

First output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and connector 156, which, unlike the first output means, can output a read signal corresponding to information stored in the storage means. and a second output means such as. In this manner, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 42AK)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components, for example, control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. and storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D capable of storing information on a plurality of electronic components, and the control means controls events corresponding to the plurality of electronic components. As write processing for writing information to the storage means when the generation condition is established, for example, write processing by the memory write processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can be executed. a backup storage unit 42AKA11 including backup storage areas 42AKA211 to 42AKA213; a backup storage unit 42AKA31 including backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313; , and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition is written is provided as a different area. is established, it is possible to execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition even while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed. In this way, even during the execution of the process of writing information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition, the process of writing information corresponding to the other can be executed, so the efficiency of the information writing process can be improved. . This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The occurrence condition may be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means, such as the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the occurrence condition corresponding to the internal state of the control means is established, the writing process is executed to write the information on the electronic parts into the storage means, and the information on the electronic parts including the control means is stored. be able to. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The first occurrence condition, for example, CPU internal error 41AKC1, VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, etc., can be established according to the internal state of the control means, the second occurrence condition, for example, such as effect control error determination 41AKC3, depending on the control means It can be established depending on the processing result, and for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. In this way, when the first occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control means is established, writing is given priority over the case where the second occurrence condition that can be established according to the processing result of the control means is established. If the write process is executed, the priority of the write process is set while avoiding conflict between the write processes of the information on the electronic components. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the next condition is set according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition, such as the writing flag 41AKF1, is being executed. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the information writing process is restricted according to such execution information, the process conflict can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The write process may store the same information in a plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. By storing the same information in a plurality of storage areas in this manner, the reliability of the information is enhanced. This enables appropriate management of information.

When a write condition different from the generation condition is established, the control means writes game-related information different from the information on the plurality of electronic components into the storage means, for example, backup processing according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. etc. may be executable. In this way, if it becomes possible to execute the process of writing game-related information in response to a write condition different from the generation condition, various information can be stored and managed. This enables appropriate management of information.

For example, output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components and capable of outputting read signals corresponding to information stored in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the readout signal, complication of the device configuration and increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

First output means such as connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and connector 156 capable of outputting a read signal corresponding to information stored in the storage means unlike the first output means. and a second output means such as. In this manner, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 43AK)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is capable of controlling a plurality of electronic components, for example, control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the gaming machine are stopped. storage means, such as backup data memories 210A to 210D, which can hold the stored contents even if the write condition is satisfied, and can store information about a plurality of electronic components. As write processing for writing information to the storage means, for example, write processing by the memory write processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 can be executed. When the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas such as 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, and the second information corresponding to the second occurrence condition is written, the information is stored in a storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas, such as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. memorize. In this way, by providing a case where the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas and a case where information is stored in a smaller number of storage areas than the plurality of storage areas, a variety of electronic components can be obtained according to the information on the plurality of electronic components. memory is made. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When the stored information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas among a plurality of storage areas that store the same information as the first information, restoration is performed based on the stored information, such as restoration by power-on information processing. It may be able to perform processing. In this way, since the restoration process is executed when the stored information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas, the reliability of the restoration based on the stored information is enhanced. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When it is determined that the stored information corresponding to the second information is abnormal, it may be possible to execute initial processing for setting initial information, such as initial value setting by power-on information processing. Since the initial processing for setting the initial information is executed in this manner, problems caused when it is determined to be abnormal can be prevented. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The second occurrence condition may be met less frequently than the first occurrence condition, such as a backup condition when power saving is set, for example. In this way, various types of storage are performed by providing the second generation condition that is less frequently satisfied. This enables appropriate management of information.

The second information may be setting information that can be set by the administrator of the gaming machine, such as power saving setting data. By storing the setting information that can be set by the manager of the gaming machine in this manner, various types of storage are performed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

Connection wires connecting the control means and the memory means, such as wires connected to terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 220, and terminals TM01 and TM02 of the connector 154 and a terminal TM11 of the connector 220, for example. , TM12, or the like, for confirming the connection state between the control means and the storage means. By providing the connection confirmation wiring for confirming the connection state in this way, the certainty of memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

For example, output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components and capable of outputting read signals corresponding to information stored in the storage means may be provided. Since such output means can output the control signal and the readout signal, complication of the device configuration and increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

First output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components; and a second output means. In this manner, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 44AK)
A game machine, such as a pachinko game machine 1, capable of playing a game, comprising first control means such as a first control unit 44AK10A capable of controlling first electronic components, and second control unit 44AK10B, etc. , a second control means capable of controlling the second electronic component, and a memory content that can be retained even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and that can store information about the first control means and the second control means, for example Storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D are provided, and when a write condition is satisfied, a write process of writing information to the storage means can be executed, and the storage means stores information related to the first control means. a first storage means such as a first backup storage section 44AK11A, and a second storage means such as a second backup storage section 44AK11B that, unlike the first storage means, can store information about the second control means. including. In this way, unlike the first storage means that can store information about the first control means, the provision of the second storage means that can store information about the second control means makes it possible to store various types of storage according to the control means. is done. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

When writing information about the first control means, processing different from writing information about the second control means, for example, processing when a CPU exception event occurs or VDP error interrupt processing may be executed. By executing different processes in this manner, various types of storage are performed in accordance with the control means. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The first storage means can store, for example, log information including exception event information of the CPU 131, and information related to the occurrence event corresponding to the first electronic component. It may also be possible to store information relating to events that occur in response to the second electronic component, such as log information including. In this way, by storing the information about the occurrence event corresponding to different electronic components, various types of storage corresponding to the electronic components are performed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The first control means can be installed on, for example, the first effect control board 12A as a board different from the first storage means, and the second control means can be installed on a board different from the second storage means, for example, the second effect It may be installed on the control board 12B or the like. By installing the control means and the storage means on different substrates in this way, maintenance work becomes easier and a flexible apparatus configuration becomes possible. This enables appropriate management of information.

The first storage means can retain stored contents using a backup power supply, for example, when using an SRAM with a battery. It may be possible to hold the stored contents without using them, and the second storage means may be capable of storing part of the stored contents in the first storage means. In this way, a part of the contents stored in the first storage means is also stored in the second storage means, so that the certainty of storage is enhanced. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

Connection wires connecting the first and second control means and the memory means, such as wires connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 220, and terminals TM01 and TM01 of the connector 154, for example. A connection confirmation wiring, such as a wiring connected to the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the TM02 and the connector 220, for confirming the connection state between the first control means and the second control means and the storage means may be provided. By providing the connection confirmation wiring for confirming the connection state in this way, the certainty of memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

For example, display means such as the image display device 5 may be provided so that the information stored in the second storage means can be output by displaying the display means, for example, when displaying a maintenance history screen. In this way, by outputting the stored information as a display, it becomes easy to confirm the stored contents. This enables appropriate management of information.

First output means, such as connectors 152 to 155, capable of outputting control signals for the first electronic components and the second electronic components; and second output means capable of outputting a signal. In this manner, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals can be prevented. This enables appropriate management of information.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 45AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, such as a pachinko game machine 1, which is capable of controlling electronic components, for example, a control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and a connector capable of outputting a control signal, for example. Output means such as 152 to 155 are provided, and the output means is capable of outputting a control signal corresponding to at least part of the control information based on the lottery result by the control means. For example, a connector 154 or the like is included as output means and second output means different from the first output means. Thus, various signals are output by providing the second output means different from the first output means capable of outputting the control signal based on the lottery result. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The second output means outputs a control signal through a path different from that of the first output means within the same board as the first output means, for example, when the connector 154 different from the connectors 152, 153, and 155 is installed. It may be possible. In this way, the control signals are output through different paths, so the reliability of various signal outputs is enhanced. This enables appropriate management of information.

The second output means may be capable of outputting a control signal according to the control information of the rendering device, such as when the connector 152 is designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4. In this way, various signals are output by outputting the control signal according to the control information of the effect device. This enables appropriate management of information.

The second output means may be capable of outputting a control signal of a signaling method different from that of the first output means, such as a communication method according to the output unit setting example 45AK01. In this way, various signals are output by outputting control signals of different signaling systems. This enables appropriate management of information.

A mounting member, such as a connector 156, capable of mounting connection means to which the inspection device of the game machine is connected is provided, and the mounting member may be soldered when the connection means is not mounted. Such soldering prevents disconnection due to oxidation or corrosion when not mounted. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The control means can execute, for example, a backup inspection process as an inspection process for outputting inspection information related to electronic components based on the received information. Different output means may be capable of outputting examination information. In this way, the test information is output by the output means according to the received information, thereby enhancing the flexibility of information output. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

The output means may be capable of outputting information relating to electronic components such as effect control error data, and game-related information relating to games such as system data and received command data. By outputting the information about the electronic parts and the game-related information about the game in this way, a variety of information is output. This makes it possible to appropriately manage information.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 95AK)
The content of any one of the above embodiments and the characteristic portions 41AK to 45AK may be changed to the characteristic portion 95AK. The characteristic portion 95AK will be described below.

(Backup memory, backup data, etc.)
In the characteristic portion 95AK, as shown in FIG. 23-1, a 1-1 backup storage portion 95AK001 to a 1-3 backup storage portion 95AK003 and a second backup storage portion 95AK004 are prepared.

The 1-1st backup storage unit 95AK001 is provided in the backup data memory 210A and has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK001A, 95AK001B, 95AK001C . . . as log areas.

The first-second backup storage unit 95AK002 is provided in the backup data memory 210B and has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK002A, 95AK002B, 95AK002C . . . as log areas.

The first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 is provided in the backup data memory 210C and has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK003A, 95AK003B, 95AK003C . . . as log areas.

The second backup storage unit 95AK004 is provided in the backup data memory 210D and has a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK004A, 95AK004B, 95AK004C, . . . as log areas.

In the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 and the 2nd backup storage unit 95AK004, among the plurality of backup data backed up in the above embodiment and the characteristic units 41AK to 45AK At least part of it is stored (backed up) as either manufacturer verification data or store verification data. Note that it is arbitrary to assign the plurality of backup data to either the manufacturer confirmation data or the store confirmation data, and the following is an example.

The manufacturer confirmation data is data confirmed by the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and includes, for example, defect identification data. The failure identification data is data for identifying the failure causing the failure by confirming the behavior of the failed pachinko game machine 1 when the failure occurs. backup data with the CPU exception event occurrence as a backup condition (backup data created and backed up by the CPU exception event occurrence processing; also referred to as CPU exception event occurrence data); and (2) VDP error interrupt request occurrence. There is backup data (backup data created and backed up by the VDP error interrupt process; also called VDP error data) as a backup condition. Furthermore, as data for identifying trouble, (3) system data, (4) received command data, (5) effect output amount data, and (6) effect history, which are created and backed up by the backup process during effect control. data, etc. The manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 collects the malfunctioning pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5), and analyzes the log information indicated by the data. , the behavior of the pachinko game machine 1 before failure can be identified, and the identified behavior can be used to search for a defect that causes the failure of the pachinko game machine 1 .

Manufacturer verification data may include other data. For example, the manufacturer confirmation data may include player history data, shop name setting data, and the like. From these data, it is possible to grasp the tendency of the players who have played the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the tendency of the players in each region, and the like.

The manufacturer confirmation data is created by a first occurrence event information creation processing unit (not shown) in the same manner as the feature unit 41AK, etc., and is backed up by a first memory writing processing unit (not shown). It is written in the storage section 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage section 95AK003. The first event information creation processing unit and the first memory writing processing unit, similar to the event information creation processing unit and memory writing processing unit such as the characteristic unit 41AK, write data from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132. It is constituted by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the read program.

When a backup condition for any of the data in the manufacturer confirmation data is established, the first event information creation processing unit creates backup data indicating log information corresponding to the establishment of the backup condition as the manufacturer confirmation data. , and stored in a first backup data buffer provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133 (for example, each process in FIGS. 8A and 8B, step S79, etc.). The second memory write processing unit reads out the backup data (manufacturer confirmation data) stored in the first backup data buffer one by one, and transfers them to the backup memory board 14 (like the characteristic portion 41AK, write Transfer or writing of backup data may be restricted by turning on/off the middle flag 41AKF1).

The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores the transferred backup data in each of the 1-1st backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3rd backup storage unit 95AK003 (stores the same data in each storage unit). Specifically, the memory controller 200 stores (backs up) the same manufacturer confirmation data in each of the backup storage area 95AK001A, the backup storage area 95AK002A, and the backup storage area 95AK003A. , backup storage areas 95AK001C to 95AK003C, . In this way, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up with a multiplicity of 3.

The log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on the pachinko game machine 1 (image display device 5) or the like. For example, the manufacturer confirmation data is read by the manufacturer (outside the store) using a data reading device connected to the connectors 152 to 156 (such as a dedicated reading device equipped with a jig dedicated to the connectors 152 to 156). (Reading may be performed using the inspection designation command of 45AK). As a result, the data for manufacturer confirmation can be read using a connector for other purposes.

The store confirmation data is data indicating log information that can be confirmed by the staff of the store (game hall) where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed (in particular, data displayed on display means such as the image display device 5 by a predetermined operation). On the other hand, since the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data cannot be confirmed by display means or the like, it is more difficult to confirm than the log information indicated by the store confirmation data), for example, the maintenance mode history screen (Fig. 14, FIG. 15) and the setting change/confirmation history screen (FIG. 16). Here, as store confirmation data, based on (1) effect control error data ("switch error", "prize ball error", "magnet error", "unfair prize winning error", etc. described above, (2) Set value change time data (It is preferable to include the set value after change and the change start time or end time data) (“Setting change finished”, “Setting change started ”, data that forms the basis of setting change/confirmation history, etc.), (3) Setting value confirmation time data (It is preferable to include the setting value data at the time of setting value confirmation) (“Setting confirmation finished”, (4) Power saving setting data, (5) Current time change data (Based on "The time has been set", etc.) and (6) power-off time data (data based on "power-off", etc.). The store confirmation data includes error information data (effect control error data), data capable of specifying the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the store clerk (setting value change time data, setting value confirmation time data, etc.), should include Note that each time data may be capable of specifying the date and time (same applies below).

As backup data, (1) RAM clearing time data indicating the time of RAM clearing with RAM clearing as a backup condition (data based on "RAM clearing", etc.), (2) Power on with power on as a backup condition. power-on time data (data based on "power-on", etc.) indicating the time of , (3) restrictions on the movement of the role when the role is provided (for example, when the role is activated, Indicate the time (including date and time, the same shall apply hereinafter) and the content of the setting change, with the setting change such as prohibition of the movement of the relevant character when an object hits the surrounding equipment of the pachinko game machine 1 as a backup condition. First setting change data, (4) Second setting change data indicating the time and content of the setting change, using setting changes such as volume and execution frequency of various effects according to commands from the management computer of the store as a backup condition, (5) ) Predetermined conditions related to the game such as "probability variation not established" may be used as backup conditions, and at least one of game progress data indicating the establishment of the conditions and the time may be prepared and included in the shop confirmation data.

In the feature part 95AK, the store confirmation data does not include the CPU exception event occurrence data and the VDP error data (therefore, it is not displayed on the maintenance mode history screen or the setting change/confirmation history screen. "VDP Error", "CPU Exception Event" in FIG. 15, etc. are not displayed). This is because these data do not need to be confirmed by store employees. On the other hand, specific backup data such as power saving setting data may be included in both the manufacturer confirmation data and the store confirmation data.

The store confirmation data is created by a second occurrence event information creation processor (not shown) and written to the second backup storage unit 95AK004 by a second memory write processor (not shown). The second event information creation processing unit and the second memory writing processing unit, similar to the event information creation processing unit and memory writing processing unit such as the characteristic unit 41AK, write data from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132. It is constituted by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the read program.

The second occurrence event information creation processing unit creates, as store confirmation data, backup data indicating log information corresponding to the establishment of the backup condition when any of the backup conditions of the store confirmation data is satisfied. , stored in a second backup data buffer provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (for example, step S79). The second memory write processing unit reads out the backup data (manufacturer confirmation data) stored in the second backup data buffer one by one, and transfers them to the backup memory board 14 (like the characteristic portion 41AK, write Transfer or writing of backup data may be restricted by turning on/off the middle flag 41AKF1).

The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores the transferred backup data in the second backup storage section 95AK004. Specifically, the memory controller 200 stores (backs up) the store confirmation data in the backup storage area 95AK004A, and similarly stores the store confirmation data in the backup storage area 95AK004B, the backup storage area 95AK004C, . Stored one by one (stored sequentially from the top of the backup storage area in FIG. 23-1). In this way, the store confirmation data is backed up with a multiplicity of one.

(Backup processing)
The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may perform backup processing shown in FIG. 23-2 at an appropriate timing. The backup process is executed for each timer interrupt. The backup process is performed, for example, during the backup process during effect control in step S79, after the process of creating backup data based on the satisfaction of the backup condition and storing the backup data in the first or second backup data buffer. It is a process to be executed (a process to be executed even when the backup condition is not satisfied), and is executed by the CPU 131 functioning as the first or second memory write processing unit.

In the backup process shown in FIG. 23-2, CPU 131 (second memory write processing unit) first determines whether or not to back up store confirmation data (step 95AKS001). This determination is made based on whether store confirmation data is stored as backup data in the second backup data buffer (if store confirmation data is stored, it is determined that the store confirmation data is backed up). It can be said that performing the backup means that a backup condition (hereinafter also referred to as a second backup condition) for backing up the store confirmation data (log information) is established.

If the store confirmation data is stored in the second backup data buffer, that is, if the store confirmation data is to be backed up (step 95AKS001: Yes), the CPU 131 (second memory write processing unit) writes the store confirmation data to the second backup storage unit 95AK004 (step 95AKS002). Specifically, the CPU 131 (second memory write processing unit) transfers the shop confirmation data stored in the second backup data buffer to the backup memory board 14 together with a storage instruction to the second backup storage unit 95AK004. (The transferred store confirmation data is deleted from the second backup data buffer). The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred store confirmation data in the second backup storage unit 95AK004 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the store confirmation data is backed up. In addition, when multiple store confirmation data are stored, all the store confirmation data shall be sequentially transferred in the order of the oldest stored data (the store confirmation data is originally small in data volume, so this method There is no problem if there is one), and one store confirmation data may be transferred in one backup process.

If the store confirmation data is not stored (step 95AKS001; No), or after step 95AKS002, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) determines whether to back up the manufacturer confirmation data (step 95AKS003). This determination is made based on whether or not the data for manufacturer confirmation is stored as backup data in the first backup data buffer (if the data for manufacturer confirmation is stored, it is determined that the data for manufacturer confirmation is to be backed up). ). It can be said that performing the backup means that a backup condition (hereinafter, also referred to as a first backup condition) for backing up the manufacturer confirmation data (log information) is satisfied.

If the manufacturer confirmation data is stored in the first backup data buffer, that is, if the manufacturer confirmation data is to be backed up (step 95AKS003: Yes), the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) Determining whether the data for manufacturer confirmation stored in the backup data buffer (if there are multiple data, the data stored most recently; the same applies to backup processing) has been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (step 95AKS004). This determination is made, for example, by the state of the first written flag provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (flag turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001). performed by

If it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 because the first written flag is off (step 95AKS004; No), the CPU 131 (first memory write process section) performs a write process for writing the manufacturer confirmation data to the 1-1 backup storage section 95AK001 (step 95AKS005). Specifically, CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) instructs the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to store the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer, and the backup memory board 14 (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically performed once, but when the data amount of the manufacturer confirmation data is larger than a predetermined standard, or when divided backup is set for the manufacturer confirmation data, the CPU 131 (First memory write processing unit) divides the data for manufacturer confirmation and transfers part of it to the backup memory board 14 . In this case, information that can specify the transferred data is held in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133, and the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) refers to the information in step 95AKS005 that is executed again thereafter. to transfer the rest of the data. In addition, the storage instruction includes information indicating that the manufacturer confirmation data is to be divided and transferred, and the number of times of transfer. When all the manufacturer confirmation data to be written have been transferred, the first written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK003 in accordance with the storage instruction (manufacturer confirmation data is divided into multiple When it is transferred, it is divided into multiple times and stored). As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in the 1-1 backup storage section 95AK001.

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (step 95AKS004; Yes), the CPU 131 (first memory write The processing unit) determines whether the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer has been written to the first-second backup storage unit 95AK002 (step 95AKS006). This determination is made, for example, by the state of the second written flag provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (flag turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the first-second backup storage unit 95AK002). performed by

If it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 because the second written flag is off (step 95AKS006; No), the CPU 131 (first memory write process section) performs a write process for writing the manufacturer confirmation data to the 1-2 backup storage section 95AK002 (step 95AKS007). Specifically, CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) instructs the first-second backup storage unit 95AK002 to store the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer as well as the backup memory board 14. (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically performed once, but when divisional transfer is performed in step 95AKS005, the manufacturer confirmation data is dividedly transferred by the same processing as in step 95AKS005. After completing the transfer of the manufacturer confirmation data to be written, the second written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002.

If it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has been written to the first-second backup storage unit 95AK002 (step 95AKS006; Yes), the CPU 131 (first memory write The processing unit) determines whether the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer has been written to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 (step 95AKS008). This determination is made, for example, by the state of the third written flag provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (flag turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003). performed by

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 because the third written flag is off (step 95AKS008; No), the CPU 131 (first memory write process section) performs a write process for writing the data for manufacturer confirmation to the first-third backup storage section 95AK003 (step 95AKS009). Specifically, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) transfers the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 together with the storage instruction to the backup memory board 14. (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically performed once, but when divisional transfer is performed in step 95AKS005, the manufacturer confirmation data is dividedly transferred by the same processing as in step 95AKS005. After completing the transfer of the manufacturer confirmation data to be written, the third written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in the 1-3 backup storage section 95AK003.

When it is determined that the third written flag is on and the data for manufacturer confirmation has already been written to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 (step 95AKS008; Yes), the data for manufacturer confirmation is Since the backup to all of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 is completed, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) sets the end of the backup (step 95AKS010). The end setting deletes the manufacturer confirmation data (the oldest manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer) from the first backup data buffer, and sets the first written flag to the third written flag. turn off the flag. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manufacturer confirmation data from being processed in the backup process by the next timer interrupt.

After any one of steps 95AKS005, 95AKS007, 95AKS009, and 95AKS010, or when the manufacturer confirmation data is not backed up (step 95AKS003: No), the backup processing ends.

As described above, in the backup process, the store confirmation data is first backed up, and then the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up. ) is higher than the backup process (transfer or write process) of the manufacturer confirmation data. Also, the backup processing (transfer or write processing) of one store confirmation data is completed by the backup processing of one timer interrupt, but the backup processing (write processing) of one manufacturer confirmation data is completed in the first time. Since backup processing for three timer interrupts of the -1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 is required at a minimum, the processing execution time of the store confirmation data backup processing (writing processing) is It is shorter than the backup processing (writing processing) of the vendor confirmation data.

(power detection circuit 95AK010, etc.)
As shown in FIG. 23-3, a power failure detection circuit 95AK010 that supplies a power failure signal to the effect control microcomputer 120 may be provided. The power failure detection circuit 95AK010 is mounted on the effect control board 12 here, but may be mounted on a board outside the effect control board 12.

A DC voltage (driving voltage for driving the performance control microcomputer 120) is applied to the performance control board 12 from the power supply board. The DC voltage is commonly applied to the effect control microcomputer 120 and the power interruption detection circuit 95AK010. During normal operation, a voltage of 12V is applied to the effect control microcomputer 120 and the power interruption detection circuit 95AK010 as the DC voltage. The power failure detection circuit 95AK010 supplies a power failure signal to the production control microcomputer 120 to stop the operation of the production control microcomputer 120 when the applied DC voltage is 8V or less.

For example, when the power is turned on, the DC voltage from the power supply board may gradually rise and become unstable, but the effect control microcomputer 120 may operate at 3V, for example. In such a case, when the DC voltage exceeds 3V in an unstable period in which the DC voltage is not stable after the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 120 starts operating at this point. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 continues to supply a power failure signal to the production control microcomputer 120 until the DC voltage exceeds 8 V that will be stabilized (when it is 8 V or less). This prevents the control microcomputer 120 from starting to operate (so-called start-up for executing initialization processing and the like in step S21 of FIG. 7).

FIG. 23-4 shows the state when the pachinko game machine 1 (main board 11 and effect control board 12) having such a power interruption detection circuit 95AK010 is reset (reset with power off and on). The power failure signal is an active Low signal (a signal that becomes Low (ON) when the DC voltage is 8 V or less and becomes High (OFF) when the DC voltage exceeds 8 V). The power interruption signal may be set to active High.

When the reset is performed at the timing of (a) in FIG. 23-4, the DC voltage supplied from the power supply board to the production control board 12 (production control microcomputer 120) drops and reaches 8V (b) A power failure signal is started to be supplied from the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 at the timing. Note that, assuming that the backup condition is satisfied by this supply start, the first event information creation processing unit (CPU 131) generates backup data ( hereinafter also referred to as power failure signal reception start data) is created as manufacturer confirmation data, stored in the first backup data buffer, and transferred to the backup memory board 14 by the first memory write processing unit (CPU 131) for backup ( The power failure signal reception start data may be backed up as store confirmation data or other data). The effect control microcomputer 120 to which the power interruption signal is supplied stops the operation, and then the power is turned off when the DC voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined voltage (the voltage at which the effect control microcomputer 120 cannot operate). In other words, the effect control microcomputer 120 becomes non-operable from the timing of (a). Along with the reset operation, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply board to the main board 11 also drops, and the main board 11 is also powered off (non-operating) at a predetermined timing.

After that, at the timing of (c), the power supply from the power supply board is restored, and the DC voltage supplied from the power supply board to the effect control board 12 gradually increases, but the DC voltage exceeds 8V (d) A power-off signal is supplied until the timing. After the timing of (D) when the DC voltage exceeds 8V and the power interruption signal is turned off, the effect control microcomputer 120 starts operating. Furthermore, at the timing of (d), it is assumed that the backup condition is met by the end of reception of the power interruption signal, and the first occurrence event information creation processing unit (CPU 131) generates log information indicating the end of reception of the power interruption signal ( (including date and time information) (hereinafter also referred to as power failure signal reception end data) is created as data for manufacturer confirmation, stored in the first backup data buffer, and is processed by the first memory write processing unit (CPU 131). It is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and backed up. Along with the restoration of the power supply from the power supply board, the main board 11 also starts operating at a predetermined timing, and the effect control command (RAM clear notification command, setting change start command, etc.) at the time of power-on is the timing (E). is supplied to the effect control board 12 at .

23-5 shows a state in which the main board 11 is not cut off (power off) or the like, and the production control microcomputer 120 (production control board 12) is reset. The effect control microcomputer 120 restarts (resets) itself when there is a malfunction such as communication between the CPU 131 and the VDP 130 or communication between the CPU 131 and the effect data memory board or the like is malfunctioning. Also, the effect control microcomputer 120 may be reset due to noise on the reset terminal, accelerator error, or program error. In such a case, even if the effect control microcomputer 120 changes from operation → non-operation → operation, the DC voltage from the power supply board does not change at 12 V, the main board 11 also continues to operate, and the power interruption signal is turned off. remains (remains non-receiving).

When the entire pachinko game machine 1 in FIG. 23-4 is reset (similarly when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on) and when only the effect control microcomputer 120 in FIG. 23-5 is reset , The former receives a power interruption signal, but the latter differs in that it does not receive a power interruption signal. That is, depending on the presence or absence of backup of the power interruption signal reception start data and the power interruption signal reception end data, the power-on mode of the production control microcomputer 120 (normal power-on of the entire pachinko game machine 1 or power-on due to reset or whether it is a reset of only the effect control microcomputer 120).

(Processing after turning on the power of the production control microcomputer 120)
In response to (or after resetting) that the power supply of the effect control microcomputer 120 in the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 is turned on (that the DC voltage that allows the CPU 131 to operate is applied), the CPU 131 , the process shown in FIG. 23-6 may be performed.

In the process of FIG. 23-6, the CPU 131 first monitors the power interruption signal and determines whether or not the change of the power interruption signal from ON to OFF is detected (step 95AKS101). If detected (step 95AKS101; Yes), the process of backing up the power interruption signal reception end data is performed as described above (step 95AKS102).

If the change is not detected (step 95AKS101; Yes), after step 95AKS102, it is determined whether a power failure signal is being received (step 95AKS103). Return to step 95AK101. Therefore, as long as the power interruption signal is received, subsequent processing is not performed, and the effect control microcomputer 120 does not start up.

If the power interruption signal is not being received (step 95AKS103; No), the CPU 131 determines whether there is a backup of the power interruption signal reception end data and the power interruption signal reception start data (step 95AKS104). 95AKS 104; Yes) indicates whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a whole has been reset (reset with power off and on) or power has been turned on (normal power on). Waiting for reception of the effect control command (step 95AKS105), when the effect control command is received, backup data indicating log information at the time of power-on (for example, RAM clear time data at the time of RAM clear notification command reception, setting change start command reception set value change time data, set value confirmation time data at the time of receiving the setting confirmation start command, power-on time data, etc.) are backed up in the second backup storage unit 95AK004 as store confirmation data (step 95AKS106).

After that, the received command data indicating the log information including the effect control command at the time of power-on from the main board 11 is backed up in each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 as data for manufacturer confirmation. (step 95AKS107). After that, the initialization processing (step S21) according to the effect control command from the main board 11 is performed (when the power failure recovery designation command is received, the power failure recovery processing is performed, etc.).

If there is no backup of the power interruption signal reception end data and the power interruption signal reception start data (step 95AKS104; No), only the effect control board 12 side (game control microcomputer 120) is reset, so the CPU 131 , an initial screen (for example, an image notifying that only the effect control board 12 side is reset) is displayed on the image display device 5 via the VDP 140 (step 95 AKS 111), and the effect control board 12 side (for game control Backup data showing log information (including date and time information) indicating that only the microcomputer 120) has been reset is backed up in each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 as manufacturer confirmation data. (step 95AKS112). After that, initialization processing (step S21) is performed in response to the fact that the performance control command at the time of power-on is not supplied from the main board 11 (for example, performance execution is resumed based on the performance control command received thereafter).

In step 95AKS105, when the CPU 131 receives a command other than the effect control command at power-on, or when the effect control command cannot be received for a predetermined period after waiting for reception, the effect control board 12 Only the DC voltage of is lowered and reset, and the main board 11 itself determines that the power supply is secured and the power supply is not cut off (even in this case, the power cutoff signal is supplied). The data may be backed up in each of the 1-1st backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3rd backup storage unit 95AK003 (the store confirmation data is not backed up). Also, the processing of step 95AKS111 is executed. Thereafter, initialization processing (step S21) is performed in response to the fact that the effect control command at power-on is not supplied from the main board 11 (for example, if a command other than the effect control command at power-on is received, the If the production control command cannot be received for a predetermined period after waiting for the command, production execution is resumed based on the production control command received thereafter).

By the above processing, the effect control microcomputer 120 determines whether the effect control microcomputer 120 is in a power-on mode (normal power-on of the entire pachinko game machine 1 (including power-on with reset) , the main board 11 can perform processing according to whether the power is turned on by resetting only the performance control microcomputer 120 that is not cut off, and in the case of normal power on of the entire pachinko game machine 1 Both store confirmation data and manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up, and only the manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up when only the performance control microcomputer 120 is reset. Furthermore, in the case of normal power-on of the entire pachinko game machine 1, as in steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107, the store confirmation data is backed up before the manufacturer confirmation data. (Priority) is higher than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data.

(Effect of Characteristic Portion 95AK)
Conventionally, backup data was backed up without distinguishing between manufacturer confirmation data and store confirmation data, so store confirmation data was stored in the same process as manufacturer confirmation data (for example, Part of the store confirmation data is stored in each of the 1-1 backup storage units 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage units 95AK003 in the same manner as the manufacturer confirmation data). However, the processing time for backing up the manufacturer confirmation data may be long as described above. The possibility that the timing of disconnection (timing of power failure) overlaps with the backup period is higher than when the processing time for backing up the store confirmation data is shortened. Also, if the processing time for backing up is long, the occurrence timing of events such as only the effect control microcomputer 120 being reset tends to overlap. If the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off during the backup, or if only the performance control microcomputer 120 is reset, the store confirmation data will not be backed up properly, and the store confirmation data will indicate, for example, In some cases, log information could not be displayed on the maintenance history screen, etc. In such a case, the person in charge may have a sense of distrust because the log information that should be displayed in the maintenance history scene is not displayed. For example, when the attendant repeatedly turns on and off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, such an operation may be performed when the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is strange), conventionally, the power is turned on Sometimes the power is turned off while backing up the time data. date and time) may not be displayed on the maintenance history screen. In such a case, the attendant or the like has a sense of suspicion as to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operating normally. In the characteristic portion 95AK, the time required for backing up the store confirmation data (transfer and writing time) is set shorter than that for the manufacturer confirmation data, so that the above-mentioned inconveniences are less likely to occur. Furthermore, the backup of store confirmation data has a higher priority than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data, and is performed preferentially. Even if data backup conflicts, the completion of the backup of the store confirmation data is not delayed). On the other hand, since the data for manufacturer confirmation is to be confirmed by the manufacturer (it cannot be confirmed by staff, etc., and it is more difficult to confirm than the data for store confirmation), it may be slightly damaged if the power is turned off during backup. The above problem does not occur even if the data is missing. In this way, by shortening the time required for backing up store verification data compared to backing up manufacturer verification data, the order of priority for backing up store verification data is set higher than the priority order for manufacturer verification data. By increasing the height (backup processing in FIG. 23-2, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107 in FIG. 23-6), store confirmation data and manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up according to the purpose of use, and backup can be performed favorably. In addition, store confirmation data and manufacturer confirmation data are backed up differently (execution time, number of writes, and number of backup storage units are different), and store confirmation data is better than manufacturer confirmation data. Also, it is easy to check the log information indicated by each data (here, the former can be checked on the pachinko game machine 1, but the latter cannot be checked), so it is possible to make the use of each data appropriate. (The data that does not need to be confirmed at the store can be used as data for manufacturer confirmation, and the data that is confirmed by the staff at the store can be used as data for store confirmation), realizing a suitable backup.

In particular, when the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 and the 2nd backup storage unit 95AK004 are configured by one FRAM (registered trademark), data is stored in each of the storage units 95AK001 to 95AK003. It takes time to do this (because the data is serially stored in the order of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001→1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002→1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003). On the other hand, in the above, the store confirmation data is stored in fewer backup storage units than the manufacturer confirmation data (here, one, but it may be two), so there is no need to back up the store confirmation data. The time has been shortened. As a result, backup can be performed favorably.

In addition, it is preferable that the data amount of the store confirmation data is smaller than the data amount of the manufacturer confirmation data (the amount of data written to the backup storage unit at one time may be reduced), so that the store confirmation can be performed more efficiently. The time required for data backup can be shortened, and backup can be performed favorably.

23-6, the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the mode of power-on of the effect control microcomputer 120 (either the pachinko game machine 1 is normally powered on, or the effect control microcomputer 120 is reset (whether the main board 11 or the like is powered off)), and when the power of the entire pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, store confirmation data and manufacturer confirmation data , and in the case of resetting only the effect control microcomputer 120, only the manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up. As a result, when only the effect control microcomputer 120 is reset, it is possible to prevent the reset from being displayed on the maintenance history screen by backing up the log information of the reset as data for shop confirmation. Normally, the reset of only the effect control microcomputer 120 is not directly related to the progress of the game and is often minor. By preventing the data from being deleted, the backup can be preferably performed.

(Modification)
Various modifications of the above configuration are possible. Modifications are exemplified below, and at least some of the following modifications may be combined.

(Modification 1)
The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may perform, for example, the power interruption date and time recording process of FIG. 23-7. This process may be executed instead of or in addition to the date/time information storage process in step S78 (for example, after the date/time information storage process).

In this process, the CPU 131 first sets a temporary storage enable flag (provided in the external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133; the same applies to the flag and timer) indicating that the temporary storage of date and time information from the timer circuit 135 (RTC) is permitted. It is checked whether it is (ON) (step 012IWS841). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the CPU 131 checks whether the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the timer circuit 135 (RTC) has timed out (step 012 IWS842). ). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, CPU 131 reads the date and time information from timer circuit 135 (RTC) and stores the read date and time information in a temporary area provided in external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133 (step 012 IWS843). Also, the CPU 131 sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

The temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 stores date and time information every 100 ms. shall be overwritten and stored in the temporary area.

If the temporary storage enable flag is not set (N in step 012 IWS841), the CPU 131 determines whether it has received an initialization command (RAM clear notification command in the above case) or a recovery command (power failure recovery command in the above case). (Step 012IWS845). If the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received, the CPU 131 checks whether the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored in the log area provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. Confirm whether or not (step 012IWS846). If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is not stored (N of step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the CPU 131 reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133, and uses the read date and time information as the power failure date and time. Log information (manufacturer confirmation data and/or store confirmation data) in the log area (manufacturer confirmation data and/or store confirmation data storage area) provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 as is stored (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

If neither the initialization designation command nor the recovery command has been received (N in step 012 IWS845), the CPU 131 sends other commands (however, such as a setting confirmation start command and a setting change start command, which are sent when the power is turned on). command) is received (step 012 IWS 848). If any other command is received, for example, if a variation pattern designation command or a display result designation command is received, the process proceeds to step 012 IWS849.

At step 012IWS849, the CPU 131 sets a temporary storage enabled flag (step 012IWS849). Also, the CPU 131 sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012IWS844).

It should be noted that once the temporary storage enabled flag is set at step 012IWS849, it is maintained until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped or the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs. And, it shall be reset by the initialization process when the effect control main process is started due to the occurrence of power-on to the gaming machine, system reset, or the like.

FIG. 23-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the date and time of power failure. As shown in FIG. 23-8, when the CPU 131 is being activated, the CPU 131 makes a determination of Y in step 012IWS841 of the power failure date and time recording process, and executes the processes of steps 012IWS842 to S844, thereby allowing the CPU 131 to wait 100 ms. The date and time information is temporarily stored in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 each time.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs, the initialization process is executed and the temporary storage enable flag is reset. At step 012 IWS841 of the recording process, the determination is N, the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is not executed, and the last stored date and time information is maintained in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or internal RAM 133 .

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in Fig. 23-8 (1), on the condition that the initialization specifying command or the recovery command is received, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read, and the read date and time The log information is stored in the log area with the power failure date and time as the information (Y in step 012IWS845, see step 012IWS847). After that, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is resumed (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012 IWS 203). Since there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred, in this case, the log information of the date and time of the power failure is not recorded (see step 012 IWS846 N).

On the other hand, if a system reset of the CPU 131 or the like occurs, the power supply to the game machine itself is not interrupted, and a power-on command such as an initialization designation command or a recovery command from the game control microcomputer 100 is issued. is not sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), if the command for specifying initialization or the command for restoration is not received, it is determined that the power failure of the gaming machine itself has not occurred. Then, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is controlled so as not to record the log information as the power failure date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), based on the reception of other commands (except for commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as the setting confirmation start command and the setting change start command), For example, when a variation pattern designation command or a display result designation command is received, a temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of date and time information every 100ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850).

If the configuration is such that the log information of the date and time of the power failure is recorded only based on the detection of the stoppage of the CPU 131, when the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs (the CPU 131 is temporarily suspended due to the system reset of the CPU 131, etc.) The log information of the date and time of the power outage is also recorded in the same state as when the power supply is stopped), and the log information of the date and time of the power outage is recorded even though the power outage of the gaming machine itself did not occur. It may be recorded. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8, the date and time when the CPU 131 is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power failure date and time, and a power-on command such as an initialization command or a recovery command is used. is received, the log information of the power outage date and time is formally recorded to prevent such a situation.

In this example, it is determined that a power failure has occurred in the game machine itself, and the date and time of the power failure is recorded in the log information on the condition that an initialization command or a command for restoration has been received. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the date and time of the power failure may be recorded in the log information based on the reception of other commands transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation start command and a setting change start command.

Also, in this example, the log information is not recorded when the system reset of the CPU 131 or the like occurs instead of the power failure of the game machine itself, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, an area for recording log information for game machine manufacturers (storage unit for manufacturer confirmation data) is provided separately from an area for recording log information for amusement arcades (storage unit for store confirmation data). Alternatively, the date and time of occurrence of a system reset of the CPU 131, etc., may be recorded as log information in the area for the game machine maker.With such a configuration, the log information may be used as information for development by the game machine maker. can be used.

A gaming machine having the above configuration as an example is exemplified below.
Predetermined control means (for example, the main board 11 and the game control microcomputer 100 for controlling the progress of the game),
A specific control means (for example, CPU 131) that performs control based on information from a predetermined control means,
The specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means was stopped (for example, the CPU 131 executes steps 012IWS842 to S844 to store the data in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 every 100ms. store date and time information),
When the power supply to the specific control means is started, the information output by the predetermined control means that can specify that the power supply has started (for example, an initialization designation command (RAM clear notification command) or at the time of recovery A power failure date and time storage means (for example, a part that executes step 012IWS847 in the CPU 131) that can store the temporarily stored date and time as the power failure date and time based on the input of a command (power failure recovery designation command)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time.

The power failure date and time storage means does not store the temporarily stored date and time as the power failure date and time if it is not possible to input information that can specify that the power supply has started when power supply to the specific control means is started ( For example, the CPU 131 does not proceed to step 012IWS847 when N in step 012IWS845, and does not store the log information in the log area as the date and time of the power failure when it does not receive the initialization designation command or the command at the time of recovery. may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time.

It may be configured such that the date and time can be temporarily stored (for example, the date and time information is stored in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133) every predetermined timing (for example, 100 ms). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time.

Based on the fact that the power supply to the specific control means is stopped, the temporary storage of the date and time is stopped at each predetermined timing (for example, the CPU 131 resets the temporary storage enabled flag in the initialization process, thereby resetting the date and time information every 100 ms temporary storage is not executed), and based on the input of predetermined information (for example, initialization designation command, recovery command, other command) output by the predetermined control means, at each predetermined timing Even if it is configured to restart the temporary storage of date and time (for example, by executing step 012IWS849, the CPU 131 sets the temporary storage enable flag and restarts the temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms). good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably store the power failure date and time.

The specific control means can store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means was started (for example, the CPU 131 records the power-on date and time as log information), and the power failure date and time storage means can store the date and time when the power supply was started. If the date and time is not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the date and time of the power failure (for example, the CPU 131 does not proceed to step 012IWS847 when the result of step 012IWS846 is N, so that the power is turned on before the power failure occurs. If the log information of the date and time is not recorded, the log information of the power failure date and time is not recorded). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state.

A gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") with different advantages for a player, and information generated during the game and history display means (for example, CPU 131 for displaying the screens of FIGS. 14 to 16) capable of identifiably displaying history information (for example, log information) of abnormalities related to games. And, initialization processing for initializing the storage contents of the storage area (eg, RAM clear) can be executed initialization processing execution means (eg, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103)) and , When the initialization process is executed, setting change processing execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically is provided with the CPU 103)), and the history display means can display in a identifiable manner that the initialization process has been executed when the initialization process has been executed and the setting change process has not been executed (for example, , RAM clear log information is displayed as shown in FIG. 15), and when initialization processing and setting change processing are executed, setting It is possible to display that the change process has been executed in a identifiable manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, only log information indicating the end of setting change ("Setting change is finished") is displayed). may be configured. According to such a configuration, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent history information from becoming difficult to check.

(Modification 2)
The effect control microcomputer 120 checks the validity of the storage contents (backup data) of each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 at an appropriate timing such as when the power is turned on, parity, checksum Alternatively, in the case of verification by arbitrary error detection processing using hash values, etc., the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (backup storage area 95AK001A) → 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (backup storage area 95AK002A) → 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 (backup storage area 95AK003A) → 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (backup storage area 95AK001B) → 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (backup storage area 95AK002B) → 1-3 When the backup data is sequentially stored in the backup storage unit 95AK003 (backup storage area 95AK003B), if the latest backup data verification result is NG, new backup data is added to the NG backup data. may be overwritten, and then other backup storage units may be stored. For example, when backup data is stored in the backup storage areas 95AK001A to 95AK003A and no backup data is stored in the backup storage area 95AK001B and beyond, the backup data stored in the backup storage area 95AK003A is NG and the others are OK. In this case, new backup data may be stored from the backup storage area 95AK003A. In this case, the same data as the NG backup data (data considered to be OK) should be stored again in the backup storage area 95AK003A as new backup data. , the backup storage area 95AK003A to the backup storage area 95AK002B may store the same three backup data (hereafter, the three same backup data are stored in the 1-3 backup storage section 95AK003 → the 1-1 backup storage section 95AK003). 95AK001→1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002). Here, if new backup data is restored (overwritten) from the backup storage area 95AK001A, there is a risk that the OK backup data will be overwritten with the NG backup data. It is possible to prevent such a risk.

(Modification 3)
Production control microcomputer 120 executes the process of backing up the manufacturer confirmation data (transfer to backup memory board 14, etc.). It may be written to a storage unit that can be backed up, and in that case, the writing process (the same applies to the manufacturer confirmation data), and the second backup process is a process of backing up the store confirmation data. , the processing itself other than the data to be backed up may be different. At least one of the amount of data to be written and the amount of data to be written may be different.

(Modification 4)
The effect control microcomputer 120 may transfer the store confirmation data and/or the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14 without passing through the first backup data buffer or the first backup data buffer. In addition, the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the fourth backup storage unit 95AK004 are provided in the production control board 12, and the production control microcomputer 120 stores store confirmation data and/or manufacturer confirmation data in the first backup data buffer. Alternatively, data may be written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 4th backup storage unit 95AK004 with or without the first backup data buffer.

(Configuration of Characteristic Portion 95AK)
Hereinafter, a gaming machine will be described with the characteristic portion 95AK as an example.

A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.),
Control means (for example, production control microcomputer 120, etc.),
Storage means capable of storing backup data (for example, backup memory board 14 (particularly, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to second backup storage unit 95AK004), etc.),
The control means is
A first backup process (for example, transferring the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition. processing of transfers, etc.), and
A second backup process (for example, a backup memory) having a shorter execution time than the first backup process for storing second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition. transfer of store confirmation data to the circuit board 14, etc.) is given a different priority from the first backup process (priority of process execution, and when the first backup process and the second backup process conflict, which one is selected)? (including the order of whether to execute first) (for example, the backup of store confirmation data is performed in a shorter execution time than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data, and the priority of processing is high, etc.),
game machine.

In the above, the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 that executes effects based on commands from the main board 11 that controls the progress of the game operates as the control means. In addition to the performance control board 12, the present invention is applied to a game machine having a second performance control board that executes a performance in cooperation with the performance control board 12 by a command from the performance control board, and the second performance control is performed. The control means may be applied to a computer, CPU, or the like mounted on a board.

The control means and storage means may be provided on the same substrate. In such a case, the first backup process and the second backup process may be processes for directly writing backup data to the storage means. Of the storage means, the portion that stores the first backup data and the portion that stores the second backup data may be parts of the same storage device such as FRAM (registered trademark), or may be two different storage devices. It may be formed from each of the storage devices. A set of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board 14 is regarded as a control means, and the first backup processing and the second backup processing are performed by the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 or the second It may be regarded as a process of transferring and writing backup data to the backup storage unit 95AK004 (even in such a case, the execution time of the second backup process is shorter in the characteristic part 95AK).

The first backup condition and the second backup condition may be the same condition or different conditions. The backup condition may be, for example, a condition that triggers creation of backup data (occurrence of an event desired to be recorded by log information, etc.). Backup data may be created (recorded in RAM or the like) when the backup condition is satisfied, and the created backup data may be stored in the storage means at the timing when a power failure may occur (" Expressions such as "store the first backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition" include such aspects). The first backup data and the second backup data may be the same data (but preferably different data). The first backup data may be, for example, at least one backup data to be the manufacturer confirmation data. The second backup data may be at least one backup data that becomes the store confirmation data.

The execution time of the first backup process and the execution time of the second backup process may be only the period during which the backup data is actually transferred or written, or the backup data may be transferred in a plurality of times, such as for each timer interrupt. Alternatively, when writing, the period may include the time between each time. Also, the execution time may be a period from the satisfaction of the backup condition to the end of the backup (it may be considered that the backup process is performed during the entire period from the satisfaction of the backup condition to the end of the backup).

Methods for making the execution time of the second backup process shorter than the execution time of the first backup process include (1) making the data amount of the second backup data smaller than the data amount of the first backup data, and (2) The number of storage destinations for the second backup data is made smaller than the number of storage destinations for the first backup data; It can be realized by

It is arbitrary which of the first backup process and the second backup process has a higher priority (for example, steps 95AKS003 to 95AKS010 may be followed by steps 95AKS001 to 95AKS002).

According to the above configuration, by making the execution time of the second backup process shorter than the execution time of the first backup process, during the second backup process power failure, etc. (game machine power off, voltage drop, etc.) power off only, resetting only the control means or the entire game machine, etc.) (the possibility that the second backup process and the power failure, etc. will overlap in time) is lower than the first backup process. (For example, the possibility that the transfer of backup data to the backup memory board 14 and the powering off of only the control means overlap, and the possibility that the writing of the backup data overlaps with the powering off of the gaming machine is reduced). In other words, the possibility of failure of the second backup process due to power failure or the like occurring in the middle is lower than that of the first backup process. Also, since the first backup process and the second backup process are executed with different priorities, both processes are not executed simultaneously. Therefore, when the first backup process and the second backup process are executed at the same time, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the execution time of the second backup process is extended due to the execution of the first backup process. The possibility of power failure etc. occurring in As described above, at least the second backup data can be backed up with a lower possibility of failure (than the first backup data), and a suitable backup is realized.

It should be noted that the execution priority of the second backup process should be higher than that of the first backup process. As a result, after the second backup condition is met, the second backup process can be executed earlier than the first backup process, and the possibility of power failure or the like occurring after the second backup condition is met until the second backup process is completed can be reduced. backup is realized.

Instead of or in addition to the configuration of the control means, the control means
A first backup process (for example, transferring the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition. processing of transfers, etc.), and
Different from the first backup process of storing the second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition different number of copies, different priority of processing, different amount of backup data written, etc.), second backup processing (for example, processing of transferring shop confirmation data to the backup memory board 14, etc.) can be executed. ,
The information indicated by the second backup data stored in the storage means is easier to confirm than the information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means (for example, the log indicated by the store confirmation data). The information can be confirmed on the image display device 5, but the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data can only be read by the manufacturer's reading device, etc.),
You may do so.

The ease of "confirmation" is, for example, the amount of time and effort required to check the information indicated by each backup data (the less time and effort, the easier the confirmation). The log information indicated by the data for manufacturer can be confirmed by the image display device 5, but the log information indicated by the data for manufacturer confirmation can be read only by the reading device of the manufacturer, and the log information can be confirmed only through the reading device. In this case, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is easier to confirm because it does not take time to read. For example, the second backup data is stored so that the information indicated by the second backup data can be displayed on display means or the like (confirmable on the gaming machine) based on the operation of the gaming machine by an attendant or the like. 1 backup data, the information indicated by the first backup data can only be confirmed by reading the first backup data from the game machine (that is, only with a device other than the game machine) (cannot be confirmed by operating the game machine) ) (the above is also an example), and in this case also, the information indicated by the second backup data is easier to check because it does not take time to read. Alternatively, the manufacturer verification data may be encrypted and stored, and the shop verification data may be stored without encryption. is easy to confirm.

The first backup process and the second backup process are different in process itself other than the first backup data and the second backup data to be stored in the storage means.
You may do so.

The first backup process and the second backup process each include, as processes themselves, an execution time, an area for storing the first backup data and the second backup data, and a process priority (process execution priority). , and at least one of the write amount of backup data at one time is different,
You may do so.

According to each of the above configurations, the first backup process and the second backup process are differentiated, and the handling of the first backup data and the second backup data after backup (the easiness of confirmation of information indicated by each data) is differentiated. Therefore, backup processing can be preferably executed.

Information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means is not reported on the gaming machine (for example, log information indicated by manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1),
The information indicated by the second backup data stored by the storage means can be notified on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. The notification may be notification by voice or the like. Further, when the execution time of the second backup process is shorter than that of the first backup process, with the above configuration, the second backup data indicating information that can be notified can be backed up with a low probability of failure. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the information indicated by the 2 backup data is not reported due to a failure of the backup process even though it should be reported, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

Based on the second backup data stored in the storage means, information indicated by the second backup data (for example, log information indicated by the store confirmation data) can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5, etc.) Display control means (for example, production control microcomputer 120 etc.)
The information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data) is not displayed on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on pachinko machine 1, etc.),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. Further, when the execution time of the second backup process is shorter than that of the first backup process, with the above configuration, the second backup data indicating information that can be displayed can be backed up with a low probability of failure. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the information indicated by the 2 backup data is not notified due to the failure of the backup process even though it should be displayed, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

The storage means
a first storage area in which the first backup data is written and the second backup data is not written (for example, the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.);
A second storage area (for example, a second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) in which the second backup data is written and the first backup data is not written,
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the storage area for the first backup data and the storage area for the second backup data can be separated, so that the backup process can be performed favorably.

The first storage area has a first number (eg, three) of storage areas (eg, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.) in which the same first backup data is written. has
The second storage area has a second number (e.g., one) of storage areas (e.g., second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) that is smaller than the first number in which the same second backup data is written.
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the execution time of the second backup process can be reliably made shorter than that of the first backup process, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

a first control means (for example, the main substrate 11, etc.);
A second control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 120, etc.), which is the control means,
The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means is reset. No (for example, in step 95AKS112, the data for manufacturer confirmation is backed up, but the store confirmation data is not backed up, etc.);
You may do so.

Although the determination of the reset is performed by the power interruption signal in the above description, it may be performed by other methods. For example, the reset may be determined by a command or the like that is first transmitted from the first control means to the second control means after reset (the command is a command other than the command that is normally transmitted after reset (variable command). pattern designating command, etc.), it is determined that only the second control means has been reset).

According to the above configuration, when only the second control means out of the first control means and the second control means is reset, the second backup process with a short execution time is not executed or the second backup process, which is easy to confirm, is not executed. Since the second backup processing for the backup data is not executed, the backup processing can be preferably executed (for example, resetting only the second control means due to the second backup data is a minor defect. (e.g., it is possible to avoid unnecessarily notifying that only the second control means has been reset).

The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when both the first control means and the second control means are reset (for example, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107). ),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. When both the first control means and the second control means are reset, the reset is normally assumed, and the fact can be firmly backed up, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

When the voltage supplied to the second control means is below a predetermined value, a signal supply means (for example, power disconnection detection circuit 95AK010, etc.),
The second control means determines whether both the first control means and the second control means are reset based on whether or not the predetermined signal is supplied after the power is turned on. It is possible to identify whether only has been reset (for example, processing after 95AKS104),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the reset control means can be specified by the predetermined signal, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, Control means (for example, performance control microcomputer 120, etc.) and storage means (for example, backup memory board 14, etc.) capable of storing backup data are provided, and the control means is based on the establishment of the first backup condition. can execute a first backup process (for example, a process of transferring the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14, etc.) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data, etc.) in the storage means. A second backup process (for example, , transfer of shop confirmation data to the backup memory board 14, etc.) can be executed in a priority order different from that of the first backup process (for example, the backup of the shop confirmation data can be executed when the manufacturer confirmation data is transferred to the backup memory board 14). the execution time is shorter than the backup and the priority of the process is high), the storage means stores the first storage area in which the first backup data is written and the second backup data is not written (for example, , 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.), and a second storage area in which the second backup data is written and in which the first backup data is not written (for example, the second backup a storage unit 95AK004, etc.), and further, a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state. and a preparation effect execution means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a reservation display advance notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggesting effects include a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. and a third suggesting effect (for example, a second chance notice effect) different from the above, and the preparation effect is a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed. and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed, and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect include: It can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 32-11 (A1) and (A2)), and the second There is a game machine in which the third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is being executed (for example, see FIG. 32-10).

According to such a configuration, backup processing can be preferably executed. In addition, it is possible to preferably maintain interest.

In other words, by making the content and priority of the backup data to be stored differ according to the backup conditions, for example, the backup of store confirmation data can be performed in a shorter execution time than the backup of manufacturer confirmation data, and the processing can be performed in a shorter time. By setting the priority to be higher, backup processing can be preferably executed by restoring power as much as possible in the event of a power failure while the game machine is installed in the store, and the third suggestive effect can be performed. is made easier to be executed when the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are not executed, so it is possible that the third suggestive effect is executed during the execution of the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect that increase the expectation. It becomes less, and interest can be maintained suitably. Also, in the event that a power outage occurs while a player's expectation is heightened due to the execution of a preparation performance or a suggestive performance, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the loss of interest in the game due to initialization that cannot be restored. can be done.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can favorably execute backup processing and favorably maintain interest, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. The game machine is a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the game machine is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a holding display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance notice effect, etc.), and a suggestive effect is executed. and a preparation effect execution means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestion effect will be executed before the first suggestion effect ( For example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggestive effect, and a third suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect (for example, The preparation effects include a first preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed, and a second suggestion effect to be executed. Including a second preparation effect to be announced (for example, timer preparation effect, etc.), the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (Fig. 32-11 ( (See A1) and (A2)), when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. , a gaming machine in which the third suggestive effect is likely to be executed (see, for example, FIG. 32-10). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 of another embodiment (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 24 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 24), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 25). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 24, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 25), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 24). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 24) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 25).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 25).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)

A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols not yet stopped and displayed are variably displayed. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small hit", the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a big hit combination ("no reach"). ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 9013 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 9013 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 9013, and the lamp control board 9014, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S905). In step S905, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the register of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set (step S9011) so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odds have changed, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S9025). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 27 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning judgment processing (step S90101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of start winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S90115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot open post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pretreatment of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S9072). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9073). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9073; No), the process of step S9073 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S9073 (step S9073; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S9074), and command analysis processing is executed (step S9075). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing command analysis processing in step S9075, production control process processing is executed (step S9076). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S9076 (step S9077), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S9073. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S9073.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9076 of FIG. 29 as the effect control process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first executes pre-reading notice setting processing (step S90161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S90170 to S90177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S90171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect processing during a small hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".
(Description of Characteristic Portion 153SG)

Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31-1 to 31-31.

First, FIG. 31-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 31-1 and 31-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (frame) 153SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, in the game machine frame 153SG003, a glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 153SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 153SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general game area 153SG002R from upstream to downstream of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can win the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 31-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 153SG005U are set on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 31-2 and 31-3, the main board 11 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 153SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 153SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052, is accommodated in the substrate case 153SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting-switching switch 153SG052 are housed in the substrate case 153SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 153SG201.

Since the substrate case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 153SG003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 153SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the board case 153SG201. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main substrate 11 and arranged above the substrate case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 31-1 and 31-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the second 1st special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st pending display capable of displaying the number of first pending memories device 153SG025A, second reservation display 153SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 153SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation storage, A round display 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and in a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 153SG002R. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 153SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 153SG133 that lights when in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 153SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A uses two types of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the variable display of the second special symbol, when the variable display result is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 153SG025A and the second suspension display 153SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 153SG025A and second pending display 153SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the part 153SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 153SG025A is lit and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 153SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can move between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 153SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 153SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321, and the second movable body 153SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322. An origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 31-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 153SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 31-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 31-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 31-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 31-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 31-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 31-5, in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 31-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 31-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 31-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31-6, a form is exemplified in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 31-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 31-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 31-7(A) and 31-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 31-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 31-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figures 31-8 (A) and 31-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 31-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 31-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 31-9. In the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability high base state, and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state of the "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It is a so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31-8(A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31-8(B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, while the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening , regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 31-10 (A) and 31-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 31-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are the normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1 -1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). assigned.

As shown in FIG. 31-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are variations of the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1- 3).

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and 2 or more are provided as a small hit variation pattern. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

As shown in FIG. 31-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 31-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for deviation (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α. , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of Super Reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 31-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 31-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display by the variation pattern of super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from decreasing.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is out of range, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 31-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 31-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic portion 153SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31-12(A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display section 153SG029A, a second display section 153SG029B, a third display section 153SG029C, and a fourth display section 153SG029D. Each of the first display portion 153SG029A to the fifth display portion 153SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 153SG029A to fifth display section 153SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors, such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment is executed using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 153SG029, as shown in FIGS. 31-12 (B) and 31-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all gaming states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentages on display monitor 153SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 153SG029B in order to display "b1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 153SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D. In addition, when displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 153SG029, in order to display the abbreviation "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 153SG029C and the fourth display portion 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying these base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 is executed under the control of the main substrate 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 153SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 31-13 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 153SG191, a production control timer setting unit 153SG192, a production control counter setting unit 153SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 153SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating a timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing section 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the startup winning command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative design variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the start-winning reception command buffer 153SG194A in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the later-described pre-reading notice setting process (FIGS. 31-18) is secured for each storage area (entry).

The pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pending display announcement effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. By doing so, the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 153SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 153SG005U, and when the execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( ☆)) or special mode (for example, blue or red camera) by setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display, is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. The possibility of a ready-to-win situation and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the reception command buffer 153SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

31-13(B), the command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 31-13(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 31-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 31-14 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (153SGSa005).

If the set value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), proceed to 153SGSa017, and if the set value stored in RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (153SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), proceed to 153SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (153SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). move on.

At 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). If the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 153SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (153SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (153SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation processing (153SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated as a identifiable set value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, when the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 153SG029 is terminated.

If the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF at 153SGSa011 (153SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

At 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 153SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 153SGSa014. If the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) without executing, go to 153SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), proceed to 153SGSa022; (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Further, at 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened, the lock switch 153SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (153SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the processes 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (153SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (153SGSa026; N), the processing of 153SGSa025 and 153SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 153SG029 stops blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 153SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (153SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (153SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, at 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from a power failure during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (153SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (153SGSa034; N), the processing of 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 153SG029A, the second display 153SG029B, the third display 153SG029C, and the fourth display 153SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 153SG029, as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. , "E." is displayed (153SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 153SGSa032 to 153SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying a display monitor 153SG029. , the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is recovered, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (153SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 31-15 is a flow chart showing the start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (153SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. 153SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (153SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), and when the number of the first special figure reserved storage reaches the upper limit at 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (153SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (153SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation storage. At 153SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (153SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start buffer value is "2" , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the result of the variable display is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the processing of 153SGS111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc., the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (153SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 153SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, and after initializing the stored value to "0" (S116), the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 31-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in 153SGS 112 of FIG. 31-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 28) changes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to " It is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control to the small hit game state as the special figure display result as "small hit", and the like. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 28), determination of variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of 153SGS112. By, determination of whether or not to derive and display the big hit pattern as a special figure display result, determination of whether or not to derive and display the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, variable display mode of the decorative pattern determines whether or not is in a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pending display forewarning effect, as will be described later.

In the random number value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 31-16 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit not shown, pachinko The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 31-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, if the starting buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in (B) may be set.

After that, with reference to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot determination range) according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted at 153SGS109 in FIGS. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that there is no jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; N), it is further set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted by 153SGS109 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the small hit determination range, the CPU 103 generates the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit determination range It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it does not become a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result is "miss". (153SGS125), and determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current game state is the time-saving state (153SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (153SGS126; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (153SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the variation pattern for loss The decision table D is selected and set (153SGSS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 31-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is, as shown in FIG. be.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A for loss and variation pattern determination table D for loss, the difference that is used when the total number of pending memories is 2 to 4 A variation pattern determination table B for loss and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. Of the variation pattern determination tables A to C, in the variation pattern determination table A for loss, a value from 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

For this reason, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 153SGS132, which will be described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 31-16 (A), when 153SGS123 determines that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot at the time of variable display (153SGS123; Y), jackpot type determination The type of jackpot is determined based on the random number MR2 for (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in 153SG130 is executed (153SG131), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot variation patterns. set (153SG132).

In addition, when it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range at 153SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it will be a small hit at the time of variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command according to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132, the fluctuation pattern determination table set in the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, and 153SGS132 and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern and is used to determine the variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (153SGS133). In the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode, a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" It is only necessary to provide a variation category and determine whether or not such a variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 31-17 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characteristic part 153SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. Any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. process is executed.

FIG. 31-18 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 31-17. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start-winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (153SGS243).

If there is an entry whose pending display flag value is already set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS242 has the pending display flag "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the advance notice setting process (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted.

In 153SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 153SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the pattern designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the pattern designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 153SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, execution/non-execution of the holding display forewarning effect and the display pattern (forecast type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 31-19(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 31-19 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied.

In the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 153SG005D or the second pending memory display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 31-19 (A), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. , the execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined, the execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (153SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-19(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and a pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect with the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 31-19(A) and 31-19(B), in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α It is set so that the type of jackpot is also jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation for being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (big hit expectation) is higher than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31-19 (B), when the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 31-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the process of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 (153SGS250). When execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry to read ahead. The advance notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 31-20 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153 SGS274). The content of the buffer number "2-0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of aligned decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach (153SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to 153SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach, suggesting effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (153SGS278). In other words, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (big hit suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only in the display, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the variable display of super reach in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a timer effect suggesting a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, and suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. , during the ready-to-win performance, which is the second half of the variable display, a jackpot suggesting performance suggesting that the result of the variable display will result in a big hit as a suggestive performance during the rear variable display, or a setting suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Suggestion production can be executed. In other words, the process of 153SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) has been determined in the process of 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is determined in the processing of 153SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (153SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is not determined unless execution of the effect during the rear variable display is determined. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, timer effects and character effects are not executed as suggestive effects during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 31-28 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect), proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282), and if it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 that is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (153SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153SGS290).

FIG. 31-21 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (153SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 31-20. 31-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SG301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-22(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, 10% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the ratio determines the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%, and determines the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, 30% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and 70% determines the performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a square or a star shape as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, the game is more concerned with whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 31-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 153SGS302 (153SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 153SGS302 that the suggestive effect during variable rear display is not to be executed, then the process of determining suggestive effect during variable rear display is terminated. , 153SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS304).

In the processing of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute a big hit suggestive effect as a suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the performance pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (153SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 31-22(B), three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 153SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is: This is a production pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. This is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the process of 153SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 31-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 153SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (153SGS307).

As shown in FIG. 31-22(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 153SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 153SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set to be low, and the setting values 5 and 6 are to be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 153SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to pattern SS- at a rate of 60% as shown in FIG. 31-24. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at the rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at the rate of 5%.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 153SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in pattern SS-1 or pattern SS-2, thereby suggesting that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the set value of 6 is confirmed.

FIG. 31-25 is a flow chart showing a suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 31-20. 31-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display (153SGS312).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestive performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-26(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 5% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big win, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and suggestive effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-26(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 31-25, after executing 153SGS313 or 153SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (153SGS315). When it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable front display is terminated, and when the execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is determined, the front is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (153SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during front variable display is completed. (153 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Among these production patterns, the pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of a big win. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

For this reason, in the processing of 153SGS317, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. , and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the pattern CS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the character effect at a rate of 80%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front part variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect decided to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable display of the part is ended (153SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big hit in image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds. (See FIGS. 31-27(C), 31-29(D) and 31-29(E)).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 31-20 to 31-28, when it is determined to execute the front variable display suggestive effect during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive performance during the rear variable display becoming 0, the process data corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined suggestive performance during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 31-28 (A) and 31-28 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in the present characteristic portion 153SG are during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 31-6). Therefore, even if the player looks away from the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect or the setting suggesting effect.

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 31-29 to 31-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 31-29(A) and 31-29(B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and the pending memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect based on the starting prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 31-29(C) to 31-29(E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the aspect of the camera is started, the front portion A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. An update display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 31-30(F) to 31-30(H), when the variable display progresses together with the timer update display until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big hit suggesting performance or setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 31-30 (I) is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is low, such as "chance!" is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and if the determined production pattern is the pattern AS-3, then the pattern shown in FIG. As indicated by -30(K), a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!", is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Furthermore, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the form of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect prompting the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the character effect as a suggestive effect during the variable front display that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as the timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started (see FIGS. 31-29(D) and 31-29(E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display is suggested. The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5 Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 has become 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect are performed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is not executed even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 31-27(B) and 31-27(C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 25 seconds and a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggesting performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggesting effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31-28, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the super ready-to-win variable display. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggesting effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half of the variable display of super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. For this reason, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the display mode is blue or red, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion performance.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 31-29 and 31-31, when the pending display notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending memory display which is the object of the pending display notice effect. The setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a holding display notice is used as a pre-reading notice. An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the variable display immediately after the pending display previous notice effect is terminated) that is the target of the pending display previous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31-19, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set to the pre-reading notice effect in which the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading advance notice effect, or the pending memory display as a blue or red camera color as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is made ready to shoot the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, from the speakers 8L and 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the present embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display forewarning effect. It is executable, and as shown in FIG. 31-22 (A), when the pending memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode (when the value of the pending display flag is 3) and when the pending memory display is red The ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect is different between the case of displaying in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 153SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31-20, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with the long special figure variation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 31-6 and 31-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion production is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so the super reach variable It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during execution of the ready-to-win effect).

Also, as shown in FIG. 31-19, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that it is a variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 31-19, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, hold display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 31-20 to 31-28, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect during the front variable display including a timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with a short fluctuation time, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue and a red camera mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 31-33(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, the first reserved memory display area 153SG005D on the image display device 5 When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 153SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 153SG005E (the blue or red camera (displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera due to the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera being blocked by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 31-34(A) and 31-34(B), as a modified example 153SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 31-34 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3.75 seconds to 3 seconds (shorter than 5.75 seconds)) may be executed setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic part 153SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 153SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode The decision ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in the case of displaying in the form of the red camera and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice performance, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of variable display) are provided as the start timing of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of super reach. Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be executed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggesting effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggesting effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as a pending display notice effect It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the reserved memory display. Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the set suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display in which the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggestion effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect has already been executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Furthermore, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing part 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the holding display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if it is an effect that can be executed from the timing before the target variable display starts.

Further, in the characterizing portion 153SG of the above embodiment, a form in which the character effect and the timer effect can be executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part, any effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 092IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 092IW will be described. In this characteristic part 092IW, a big hit suggesting performance suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will result in a big hit, and a preparation performance notifying that the big win suggesting performance will be executed before the big win suggesting performance is executed. It is possible. In addition, the jackpot suggestion effect that is predicted to be executed by the preparation effect is the prediction effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (the variable display that is pending execution), and the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed. It may be either a foretelling effect that forewarns the degree. In this characterizing section 092IW, as the jackpot suggesting effects, it is possible to execute a pending display forewarning effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye forewarning effect. In addition, as a preparatory effect for notifying that the big hit suggesting effect will be executed before the big hit suggesting effect is executed, a pending display for notifying that the pending display notifying effect will be executed before the pending display notifying effect is executed. A notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed can be executed.

FIG. 32-1 is a part of the flow chart of the effect control process (step S76) in this characterizing part 092IW. In the effect control process processing in this characteristic part 092IW, after execution of the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) in which determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed for executing the pre-reading notice effect shown in FIG. A pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS162) for execution is executed, and then one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 30 is executed.

FIG. 32-2 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 32-1.

In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for one set of starting winnings has been received (step 092IWS001). Specifically, it is checked whether or not one set of start winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command is newly stored in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning. In this example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the command at the time of starting winning is received, the received command at the time of starting winning is stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning provided in RAM122. In this example, since the upper limits of the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are 4, the reception command buffer at the time of start winning has four stores corresponding to the first reserved memories and the second reserved memories. area is provided. If the command for one set of start winning has not been newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

When one set of starting winning command is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed (step 092IWS001). If the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading notice effect is executed).

If the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of pending memories is 2 or more (step 092IWS002). If the number of pending memories is not 2 or more, the process is terminated as it is (that is, no new pre-reading announcement effect is executed). It should be noted that whether or not the number of reserved memories is two or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the number of reserved memories notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the pending storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS003).

The pending display notice performance is a performance suggesting that the display result of the corresponding variable display will be a big win by changing the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) to a display mode different from the normal mode. In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a pattern of changing the display mode at the time of being displayed as the pending memory display is shown as the pending display notice effect, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and is displayed as the pending memory display. It may include a pattern that is displayed in a normal mode when it is active and changes the display mode when it is displayed as an active display. That is, it may be possible to execute the pending display announcement effect that changes the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect for notifying that the suspension display notice effect will be executed may be configured to be executable at an arbitrary timing from the start winning point to the end of the target variable display. Also, the display mode of the pending memory display or the active display may be configured to change multiple times. In the case of such a configuration, it may be possible to execute the suspension display announcement preparation effect corresponding to each suspension display announcement effect.

FIG. 32-3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display notice effect determination table. At step 092 IWS003, a random number for determination of effect is extracted, and the pending display notice effect determination table is referred to. Based on which one of ``missing super reach'', ``jackpot other than jackpot A'', and ``jackpot A'' corresponds, the suspension display notice effect is set to ``no execution, suspension memory display: normal mode (white)'', ``execution Select one of the following: Yes Reserved memory display: 1st effect mode (blue), Executed Reserved memory display: 2nd effect mode (green), and Executed Reserved memory display: 3rd effect mode (red) do.

In the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-3(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number for effect determination is assigned for each winning determination result. Percentages of judgment values obtained are shown. In other words, for each prize-winning judgment result, the pending display notice effect is "without execution pending memory display: normal mode (white)", "executed pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)", "executed pending memory Display: 2nd production mode (green)" and "execution pending memory display: 3rd production mode (red)" are determined. In this example, in addition to the pending display notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-3(A), the pending display notice preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-3(B) and the FIG. Regarding the timer effect determination table, the timer preparation effect determination table shown in FIG. 32-4(B), and the chance eye preview effect determination table shown in FIG. The ratio of whether it is determined to

Features of the pending display notice effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 32-3(A), in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "loss", the pending display notice effect "no execution" The determination value is assigned so that the rate of determination of "executed" is higher than that of ". In addition, in the pending display notice effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "losing", "with execution pending memory display: first effect mode (blue)" ``With execution, reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green)'' and ``with execution, reserved memory display: 2nd production mode (green)'' are decided to be ``with execution, reserved memory display: 3rd production mode (red)''. Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, when the pending display notice effect is executed, the second effect mode (green) is preferred to the first effect mode (blue), and the third effect mode (red) is preferred to the second effect mode (green). , it will be suggested that it will be a jackpot That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of third rendering mode (red)>second rendering mode (green)>first rendering mode (blue)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the pending display notice effect in step S092IWS003 (N of step S092IWS004), the process proceeds to step S092IWS008, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS004), the effect control CPU 120 suspends A pending display notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the display notice effect is set (step S092IWS005).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS006). The pending display advance notice preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the pending display advance notice effect will be executed before the pending display advance notice effect is executed.

FIG. 32-3(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table. At step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table is referred to. It is determined to be either “with execution, first rendering mode (small effect)” or “with execution, second rendering mode (large effect)”.

Features of the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 32-3(B), in the pending display advance notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation of the effect mode of the pending display advance notice effect of the big hit, the more the holding display advance notice preparation effect is “executed”. Judgment values are assigned so that the rate of determination of "with execution" is higher than that of "without execution". Further, in the pending display notice preparation effect determination table, the higher the expectation of the effect mode of the pending display notice effect of the big hit, the higher the “executed first effect mode (small effect)”. The determination value is assigned so that the ratio of determination to "2 effect mode (large effect)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big win is achieved when the holding display advance notice preparation performance is executed and further when it is executed in the second performance mode (large effect) rather than the first performance mode (small effect). will be That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (large effect)>first presentation mode (small effect)>no execution.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the reserved storage number is 3 or more (step 092IWS007). If the reserved storage number is not equal to or greater than 3, the process ends. It should be noted that whether or not the number of pending memories is 3 or more can be determined, for example, by confirming the pending memory number notification command received from the game control microcomputer 100 .

When the number of pending memories is 3 or more, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution (step 092IWS008).

The timer effect suggests a period from the start timing of the target variable display to the start of execution of a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect during the rear variable display in the characteristic portion 153SG), as well as suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. It is a performance.

In this characterizing portion 092IW, the timer effect is executed during the target variable display. It is realized by setting a production control pattern and executing various production controls based on the production control pattern in the production process during variable display (S172).

In addition, not limited to the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, for example, it is not decided whether or not to execute the timer effect at the time of starting winning, and whether or not to execute the timer preparation effect described later and the effect mode in the case of executing it are determined. It may be determined whether or not to execute the timer effect when the target variable display is started. Further, in this case, whether or not to execute the timer effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different ratios according to whether or not the timer preparation effect is to be executed and the effect mode.

Further, for example, the timer effect may be started during the variable display that is executed before the target variable display, or at the timing after a predetermined period has passed since the target variable display is started. You may start. That is, the timer effect may be started at an arbitrary timing from the timing of starting winning to the end of the target variable display. Similarly, for the timer preparation effect that foretells that the timer effect will be executed, any timing from the timing of the start winning to the end of the target variable display (however, until the timing when the execution period of the timer effect can be secured) You may start with

FIG. 32-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer effect determination table. In step 092 IWS008, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, and the timer effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received commands (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of starting winning are "non-super reach", "super Based on whether it corresponds to either of "reach failure" and "super reach jackpot", the timer effect is set to "no execution", "execution first effect mode (25 seconds)" and "execution second effect mode (30 seconds)". second)”.

Features of the timer effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 32-4(A), in the timer effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", compared to the case of "lose", the timer effect is more "not executed" than "no execution". Judgment values are assigned so as to increase the percentage of judgments of "executed". In addition, in the timer effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "losing", the "second effect with execution mode (25 seconds)" is higher than the "first effect mode with execution (25 seconds)". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage determined in "mode (30 seconds)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big win is achieved when the timer performance is executed and further when the second performance mode (30 seconds) is executed rather than the first performance mode (25 seconds). Become. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second presentation mode (30 seconds)>first presentation mode (25 seconds)>no execution.

If it is determined not to execute the timer effect in step S092IWS008 (N of step S092IWS009), the process proceeds to step S092IWS012, and if it is determined to be executed (Y of step S092IWS009), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect. A timer effect flag indicating that it has been decided to execute is set (step S092IWS010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the timer preparation effect (step S092IWS011). The timer preparation effect is one of the preparation effects, and foretells that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 32-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer preparation effect determination table. In step 092IWS006, a random number for determining the effect is extracted, the timer preparation effect determination table is referred to, and based on the effect mode of the timer effect, the timer preparation effect is set to "no execution", "executed first effect mode ( (small effect)" or "executed, second rendering mode (large effect)".

Features of the timer preparation effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 32-4(B), in the timer preparation effect determination table, as the effect mode of the timer effect has a higher expectation of a big hit, the timer preparation effect is more "executed" than "no execution". Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio of the judgments of "Yes" is high. Further, in the timer preparation effect determination table, as the effect mode of the timer effect has a higher expectation for a big hit, the "second effect mode with execution (character A)" is more likely than the "first effect mode with execution (character A)". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage determined to be "Character B)" is high. With such a configuration, it is suggested that a big hit is achieved when the timer preparation performance is executed and further when the second performance mode (character B) is executed rather than the first performance mode (character A). become. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win increases in the order of second effect mode (character B)>first effect mode (character A)>no execution.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured such that the effect mode of the executable jackpot suggestive effect is different depending on which effect mode of the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32-3(B), when the suspension display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the suspension display is performed in one of the first to third effect modes. When the advance notice effect is executed and the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed, the pending display advance notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 32-4(B), when the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed in one of the first to second effect modes. When the timer effect of the second effect mode is executed, the timer effect is executed by the second effect mode. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied depending on the production mode of the preparation production, and each production form of the preparation production (that is, each expectation level) is executed in combination with other preparation production and big hit suggestion production. It is possible to suitably adjust the degree of expectation at the time.

Also, in this characterizing portion 092IW, the big hit suggestion effect is configured to be executable without executing the corresponding preparation effect. Specifically, when it is determined to execute a pending display notice effect or a timer effect, it may be determined that the pending display notice preparation effect or timer preparation effect is not to be executed (Fig. 32-3 (B), Fig. 32- 4(B)). And it is configured such that the easiness of execution differs depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect has been executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32-3, when the result of determination at the time of winning is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 32-4, it is likely to be determined that the timer effect is also executed. However, it may be decided not to execute the timer preparation effect. Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect not corresponding to the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is not executed. With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In this characteristic part 092IW, when the preparatory effect is executed, the corresponding big hit suggestive effect is always executed. A normal preparation effect to be executed and a fake preparation effect to which the corresponding jackpot suggesting effect is not executed after the effect may be executable. In this case, when the fake suspension display advance notice preparation effect is executed, compared to when the fake suspension display advance notice preparation effect is not executed, the timer effect (may or may not be accompanied by the timer preparation effect) may be absent) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is false, and it is possible to preferably maintain the interest.

Further, in this characteristic portion 092IW, the proportion of which performance mode of the jackpot suggestive effect is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed. Specifically, when the performance mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect is determined to be the second effect mode, compared with the case where the first effect mode is determined, the pending display notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect are performed. The percentage of decisions to execute is high (see FIGS. 32-3(B) and 32-4(B)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye announcement effect (step 092IWS012).

The chance eye notice effect is obtained by deriving and displaying a chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decoration symbols "123") as a display result of the variable display executed before the target variable display. This is an effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display (or any of the variable displays that are not specified and that are held and stored) will be a big hit.

FIG. 32-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance eye announcement effect determination table. At step 092 IWS012, a random number for determination of effect is extracted, and the chance eye notice effect determination table is referred to, and the newly received command (symbol designation command and variable category command) at the time of start winning is "non-super reach", Either ``no execution'' or ``with execution'' is determined for the chance notice performance based on which one of ``loss of super reach'', ``jackpot other than jackpot A'', and ``jackpot A'' corresponds.

The feature of the chance eye announcement effect determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 32-5(A), in the chance prediction effect determination table, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", compared to the case of "loss", the chance prediction effect is "not executed". The determination value is assigned so that the rate of determination of "executed" is higher than that of ". With such a configuration, it is suggested that there will be a big hit when the chance's foretelling effect is executed.

This feature part 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, and a chance eye notice effect as the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in 32-5(A), the chance notice effect is executed when the winning judgment result is a big hit at a lower rate than the pending display notice effect and the timer effect, and is executed when the result is a loss. Therefore, there is little difference in the execution ratio between when the winning judgment result is a big hit and when it is not. Therefore, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance-eye forewarning effect than in the pending display forewarning effect and the timer effect.

When it is decided not to execute the chance eye notice effect in step S092IWS012 (N of step S092IWS013), the process proceeds to step S092IWS015, and when it is decided to execute (Y of step S092IWS013), the effect control CPU 120 A chance eye notice effect flag indicating that it is decided to execute the eye notice effect is set (step S092IWS014).

Next, when the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step S092IWS015), the effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display according to the determination of the pending display notice preparation effect (step S092IWS016). .

In step S092IWS016, for example, when it is determined to execute the suspension display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a new suspension memory display in the normal mode, and also displays the suspension memory display. A small effect image (see, for example, the small effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 32-11 (B1)) is displayed near the . Further, when it is decided to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect of the second effect mode, in the image display device 5, a new pending memory display is displayed in the normal mode, and an effect is displayed in the vicinity of the pending memory display. A large image (see, for example, the large effect image 092IW004b in FIG. 32-11 (A1)) is displayed.

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS017), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS017), It is checked whether or not the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (step S092IWS018). Then, when the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode (Y in step S092IWS018), effect control CPU 120 executes a timer preparation effect (step S092IWS019). After that, the process ends.

In step S092IWS019 (and step S092IWS022 to be described later), for example, when it is determined that the timer preparation effect of the first effect mode is to be executed, character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed on the image display device 5. An image (see, for example, image 092IW005 of character A in FIG. 32-10(E)) is displayed. Further, when it is decided to execute the timer preparation effect of the second effect mode, the image display device 5 displays a character B image for notifying that the timer effect will be executed.

When the pending display notice effect flag is not set in step S092IWS015 (N of step S092IWS015), effect control CPU 120 displays a new pending storage display in a normal mode (step S092IWS020).

Next, when the timer effect flag is not set (N of step S092IWS021), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is, and when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step S092IWS021), A timer preparation effect is executed (step S092IWS022). After that, the process ends.

FIG. 32-6 is a flow chart showing a pre-reading notice execution process (step 092IWS161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 32-1.

In the pre-reading notice execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the pending display notice effect flag is set (step 092IWS102) when it is time to shift the reserved storage (Y in step 092IWS101). .

When the pending display notice effect flag is set (Y in step 092IWS102), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS103).

When the pending display notice preparation effect is being executed (Y in step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 ends the pending display notice preparation effect and executes the pending display notice preparation effect (step 092IWS104).

Next, when the timer effect flag is set (Y of step 092IWS105), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the timer preparation effect is being executed (step 092IWS106).

When the timer preparation effect is not being executed (N of step 092IWS103), the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer preparation effect (step 092IWS107).

Next, execution timings of the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect, and the timer effect and the timer preparation effect will be described. FIG. 32-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution timing of the pending display notice effect (preparation effect) and the timer effect (preparation effect).

FIG. 32-7(A) shows an example of the case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the suspension display notice preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 32-2), and is suspended at the shift timing of the suspension storage. After the display announcement preparation effect is completed, the pending display announcement effect is executed (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading announcement execution process shown in FIG. 32-6).

FIG. 32-7(B) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. In this case, the timer preparation effect is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS021 to 092IWS022 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 32-2), and at the start timing of the target variable display. When the timer preparation effect ends and the timer effect is started (for example, the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set in the variable display start setting process (S171), and the output control pattern is set in the variable display effect process (S172). realized by executing various production controls based on patterns).

FIG. 32-7(C) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 32-2). , the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS018 to 092IWS019 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 32-2). Then, at the shift timing of the pending memory, the pending display notice preparation effect is completed and the pending display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 32-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect starts (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, It is realized by executing various effects control based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

FIG. 32-7(D) shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning. . In this case, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is started at the timing of the start winning (for example, it corresponds to the processing of steps 092IWS015 to 092IWS016 of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 32-2). , the timer preparation effect is not started (for example, it corresponds to the processing of step 092IWS018 of the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 32-2). Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect is completed at the shift timing of the pending memory and the pending display notice preparation effect is executed (for example, corresponding to the processing of steps 092IWS101 to 092IWS104 of the pre-reading notice execution processing shown in FIG. 32-6). , the timer preparation effect is started (for example, corresponding to steps 092IWS105 to 092IWS107 of the pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 32-6). After that, the timer preparation effect ends at the start timing of the target variable display, and the timer effect starts (for example, in the variable display start setting process (S171), the effect control pattern for executing the timer effect is set, It is realized by executing various effects control based on the output control pattern in the variable display effect process (S172).

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect. FIG. 32-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the effects of the pending display advance notice preparation effect and the timer preparation effect.

FIG. 32-8 shows an example of a case where it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer effect and the timer notice preparation effect at the time of starting winning, and FIG. -7(D) corresponds to the example.

As shown in FIGS. 32-8 (A) and (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and based on the starting prize, the suspension display notice effect and the suspension display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) When the execution of the timer effect and the timer advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is determined, a new suspended memory display is displayed in the normal mode in the first suspended memory display area 092IW001 and the second suspended memory display area 092IW002. be. At this time, the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is started, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed in the vicinity of the new suspension memory display. Note that the timer advance notice preparation effect is restricted from being executed simultaneously with the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), so it is not executed at this timing.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 32-8(C) to 32-8(D), when the variable display is completed and the pending storage is shifted and a new variable display is started, the pending display notice preparation is performed. The rendering (second rendering mode) ends expansively (for example, display control is performed such that the lightning bolt-shaped large-effect image 092IW004a acts on the reserved memory display and disappears), and the display mode of the reserved memory display changes to red. A holding display forewarning effect (third effect mode) is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 32-8(E), the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is started, and an image 092IW005 of character A for notifying that the timer effect will be executed is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 32-8(F) to 32-8(G), when a new variable display targeted for the timer effect is started, the timer preparation effect (first effect mode) is expansive. , and a timer effect (first effect mode) is started in which the timer is updated and displayed for 25 seconds, which is the period until the specific effect during the variable display.

This characterizing portion 092IW is configured to be able to execute a pending display notice effect and a timer effect as a jackpot suggesting effect suggesting that the variable display result of the variable display will result in a big win. In addition, a holding display notice preparation effect for notifying that the holding display notice effect will be executed before the holding display notice effect is executed, and a timer for notifying that the timer effect will be executed before the timer effect is executed. It is configured to be able to execute the preparation performance as the preparation performance.

Such a preparatory performance has a function of drawing attention to the big-win suggestive performance executed after the preparatory performance, but when a plurality of preparatory performances are simultaneously executed, the player's expectations are too high, resulting in a big win. If not, there is a risk that interest will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 092IW, simultaneous execution of a plurality of preparation effects is restricted. Specifically, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are executed in different periods and are configured not to be executed at the same time (in this example, the pending display notice preparation effect ( After the execution of the second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 32-7(D)). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, the execution period of the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are configured so as not to overlap at all. The execution period may be made different by making one of the end timing different.

Further, in the configuration of this characteristic part 092IW, the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode), which has a lower expectation level than the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode), can be executed simultaneously with the timer preparation effect. However, not limited to such a configuration, the reservation display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is not as high as the reservation display notice preparation effect (second effect mode), but the timer preparation is performed at a predetermined ratio. It may not be executed at the same time as the presentation. Also, a plurality of preparation effects may not always be executed at the same time.

Further, for example, the effect mode of the pending display advance notice preparation effect is the first effect mode with lower expectations than the second effect mode, and the effect mode of the timer preparation effect is the first effect mode with lower expectations than the second effect mode. It may be executed at the same time only in the case of the presentation mode.

Further, for example, when a plurality of preparation performances are executed simultaneously (or when a plurality of preparation performances are simultaneously executed in a second performance mode with a high degree of expectation), a big win may be determined. .

Further, in the configuration of this characteristic portion 092IW, a pattern is shown in which the display mode of the pending memory display changes once, but a pattern is provided in which the display mode of the pending memory display (and the active display) changes multiple times. When the reserved memory display (or active display) is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode (specifically, a display mode in which there is a display mode with a higher degree of expectation), the retained memory An effect suggesting that the display mode of the display (or active display) will change (for example, if an arrow flies toward the reserved memory display (or active display) and pierces the reserved memory display (or active display), the change will occur. , the effect that does not change unless stabbed (may be a dedicated effect that is executed only when the display mode of the reserved memory (or the active display) is in a display mode other than the normal mode), etc.) may be executed more frequently. , may be prevented from being executed.

Next, a description will be given of the processing for executing the chance prediction effect. FIG. 32-9 is a flow chart showing an example of the chance prediction setting process. The chance eye advance notice setting process is executed as part of the variable display start setting process (step S171) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 32-1.

In the chance prediction setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the chance prediction effect flag is set (step 092IWS201). If the chance prediction effect flag is set, the decision table is used to determine whether or not the chance prediction effect is to be executed (step 092, IWS 202).

FIG. 32-10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance prediction execution propriety determination table. As shown in FIG. 32-10, when neither the pending display notice preparation effect nor the timer preparation effect is being executed, the percentage of "executable" (that is, execution of the chance eye notice effect) is 100%. allow). In addition, when either the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is being executed in the second effect mode, the percentage of 20% is "executable" (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is permitted). ), and 80% of the time, it is determined that "execution is not permitted" (that is, the execution of the chance prediction effect is not permitted). In addition, when either the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is executed in the first effect mode (and neither of them is executed in the second effect mode), the ratio is 100%. , it is determined that "execution is not allowed" (that is, the execution of the chance notice effect is not permitted).

If execution of the chance eye announcement effect is permitted in step 092IWS202 (Y in step 092IWS203), the chance eye symbol (in this example, a combination of decorative symbols "123") is determined as the decorative symbol stop symbol (step 092IWS204). It should be noted that, before step 092IWS204, when the stop design of the decoration design has already been determined, the stop design of the decoration design is changed to the chance eye design.

Next, a description will be given of the effects of the pending display notice preparation effect and the chance eye notice effect. FIG. 32-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect modes of the pending display notice preparation effect and the chance notice effect.

As shown in FIGS. 32-11 (A1) and (A2), the suspension display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt-shaped image 092IW004a with a large effect is displayed near the suspension memory display. Occasionally, there is a case where the execution of the chance prediction effect is permitted, and when the execution is permitted, the chance symbol (a combination of decorative symbols "123" in this example) is used as the decorative symbol stop symbol. Is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (second effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are executed simultaneously.

As shown in FIGS. 32-11 (B1) and (B2), the pending display advance notice preparation effect (first effect mode) is executed, and a lightning bolt-shaped small and large image 092IW004b is displayed near the pending memory display. Since execution of the chance's foretelling performance is not permitted when the game is on, a stop pattern of a decorative pattern different from the chance's pattern (combination of decorative patterns of "123" in this example) is displayed. That is, the pending display notice preparation effect (first effect mode) and the chance eye notice effect are not executed at the same time.

In this characteristic part 092IW, it is possible to execute a chance notice effect separately from the pending display notice effect and the timer effect as the jackpot suggestion effect, and this chance notice effect is a preparation effect such as a pending display notice preparation effect and a timer preparation effect. (that is, it is executed in a period before execution of the target variable display, see FIGS. 32-11 (A1) and (A2)). In addition, as described above, the degree of expectation for a big win is lower in the chance eye notice effect than in the pending display notice effect and the timer effect. Therefore, when the preparatory performance is being executed (that is, before the big hit suggesting performance is executed and the degree of expectation is unknown), the chance prediction performance with low expectation of the big win is executed. If so, there is a possibility that the production effect of the preparation production is lowered. Moreover, there is a possibility that the suggested degree of expectation may become difficult to understand. Therefore, the present characteristic part 092IW is configured so that the second chance notice effect is more likely to be executed when the pending display notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is not executed than when it is executed ( For example, see Figures 32-10). With such a configuration, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in this characteristic part 092IW, when the preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the preparation effect of the second effect mode with higher expectation than the first effect mode is executed, the chance notice is given. It is configured such that the easiness of execution of the production is different. Specifically, the second chance notice effect is more pronounced when the pending display notice preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect) than when it is executed in the first effect mode (small effect). It is configured so that execution is easily permitted (see Fig. 32-10). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain interest while securing an opportunity to execute the chance prediction effect.

As described above, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is provided. Executable suggestive effect execution means, and preparation effect execution capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, pending display advance notice preparation effect, timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed. means, the suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) and a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and the preparation effect includes a second A first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that one suggestion effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, timer preparation effect) for notifying that the second suggestion effect will be executed. , the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect can be executed at the same time, and the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are restricted from being executed at the same time (for example, the pending display advance notice preparation The effect (second effect mode) and the timer preparation effect are not executed at the same time (see FIG. 32-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggesting effect includes a first suggesting effect (for example, a pending display notice effect), a second suggesting effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect. includes a different third suggesting effect (for example, a chance first notice effect), and the preparation effect includes a first preparation effect (for example, a hold display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggesting effect will be executed, and a second Including a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect) that foretells execution of the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed in parallel during the same period. It is possible (see FIGS. 32-11 (A1) and (A2)), and when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is being executed, either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect The third suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when neither is being executed (for example, see FIG. 32-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggestive effects include a plurality of types of first suggestive effects with different expectations (for example, pending display announcement effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggested effects. and the first suggesting effect includes a predetermined first suggesting effect and a special first suggesting effect with a higher degree of expectation than the predetermined first suggesting effect (for example, a first effect mode (blue) suspended display (including the notice effect and the pending display notice effect of the third effect mode (red)), and the preparation effect is the first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestion effect will be executed (for example, the reserve display notice preparation effect). and a second preparation effect (for example, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed, and the first preparation effect includes a first effect mode and the first effect as a effect mode. There is a second effect mode in which the special first suggestion effect is more likely to be executed than the mode (for example, there are a first effect mode (small effect) and a second effect mode (large effect), and a second effect mode (large effect). ) is executed, the holding display forewarning effect of the first effect mode (blue) is not executed, and the holding display forewarning effect of the third effect mode (red) is likely to be executed. 3 (B)), the execution ratio of the second preparation effect is different between when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed ( For example, the timer preparation effect is executed at the same time when the pending display notice preparation effect of the first effect mode (small effect) is being executed, but the pending display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode (large effect) is executed. are not executed at the same time (see Figure 32-7). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, a suggestive effect (for example, a pending display notice effect, a timer effect, a chance eye notice effect, etc.) suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) can be executed. An execution means and a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect (for example, a pending display notice preparation effect, a timer preparation effect, etc.) for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed, The suggestive effects include a plurality of types of first suggestive effects with different expectations (for example, pending display announcement effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a timer effect) different from the first suggested effects. and a third suggesting effect (for example, a chance forewarning effect) different from the first suggesting effect and the second suggesting effect, and the first suggesting effect includes a predetermined first suggesting effect and the predetermined first suggesting effect. Including a special first suggestive effect with a higher expectation than the effect (for example, including a first effect mode (blue) pending display notice effect and a third effect mode (red) pending display notice effect), preparation The effects include a first preparation effect (for example, pending display notice preparation effect) for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect (for example, timer The third suggestion effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect can be executed in parallel during the same period (see FIGS. 32-11 (A1) and (A2)). The first preparation effect has a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which a special first suggestive effect is more likely to be executed than the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode (small effect)). There is a second production mode (large effect), and when the pending display notice preparation production of the second production mode (large effect) is executed, the holding display notice preparation production of the first production mode (blue) is not executed, 3 production mode (red) is likely to be executed holding display notice effect (see FIG. 32-3 (B)), when the first preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, and when the first preparation effect of the second effect mode The execution ratio of the third suggestive effect differs depending on when the effect is executed (for example, the second chance preview effect is more effective when the pending display preview preparation effect is executed in the second effect mode (large effect). Execution is more likely to be permitted than when it is executed in the first rendering mode (small effect) (see FIG. 32-10). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the period during which the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect are executed are different (for example, after the execution of the pending display advance notice preparation effect (second effect mode) is completed, the timer preparation effect is executed (see FIG. 32-7(D)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the first suggestive effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (blue), second effect mode (green), third effect mode (red), etc.). 3 (A)), and the first preparation effect has a plurality of types of effect modes (eg, first effect mode (small effect), second effect mode (large effect), etc.). -3 (B)), and depending on which production mode the first preparation production is executed, the production mode of the first suggestive production that can be executed differs (for example, the first When the holding display advance notice preparation effect of the first effect mode is executed, the holding display notice preparation effect is executed in one of the first to third effect modes, and the holding display notice preparation effect of the second effect mode is executed. If it is done, the pending display notice effect is executed in one of the second to third effect modes). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in this characteristic part 092IW, the suggestion effect can be executed without executing the corresponding preparation effect There is a case where the timer preparation effect is determined not to be executed (see FIGS. 32-3 (B) and 32-4 (B)), depending on whether or not an uncorresponding preparation effect is executed, the ease of execution Different (for example, as shown in FIG. 32-3, when the winning determination result is a big hit, it is likely to be decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the pending display notice preparation effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 32-4 In addition, it is easy to determine if the timer effect is also executed.However, it may be determined that the timer preparation effect is not executed.Then, when the pending display notice preparation effect that does not correspond to the timer effect is executed, the pending display The timer effect is more likely to be executed than when the advance notice preparation effect is not executed). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 092IW, the ratio of which suggestive effect of the effect mode is executed differs depending on whether or not the preparation effect is executed (for example, the effect mode of the pending display notice effect and the timer preparation effect). is determined to be the second effect mode, compared to the case of being determined to be the first effect mode, the ratio of deciding to execute the pending display advance notice preparation effect or the timer preparation effect is higher. See FIG. 32-4(B)). Therefore, interest can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 092IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions such as the characterizing portion 153SG to form a gaming machine. For example, the timer preparation effect indicated by the characteristic part 092IW indicates that a timer effect suggesting a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, as well as suggesting that the jackpot indicated by the feature part 153SG will be executed. The timer performance can execute a big hit suggesting performance suggesting a big win as a suggesting performance during the rear variable display during the ready-to-win performance or a setting suggesting performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加You may make it become.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 11... Main board 12... Production control board 14... Backup memory board 120... Microcomputer for control of production 131... CPU
140 … VDP
150 to 156 ... Connectors 210A to 210D ... Backup data memory

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
setting means capable of setting a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player;
a control means;
a storage means capable of storing backup data;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state;
a preparation effect executing means capable of executing a preparation effect for notifying that the suggestive effect will be executed before the suggestive effect is executed;
and a production determination means capable of deciding whether or not to execute the production ,
The control means is
capable of executing a first backup process of storing first backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of a first backup condition;
capable of executing a second backup process of storing second backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of a second backup condition;
The suggestive effect comprises a first suggestive effect, a second suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect different from the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect when executed. and a third suggestive effect in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is lower than that of the second suggestive effect,
The preparation effect includes a first preparation effect for notifying that the first suggestive effect will be executed, and a second preparation effect for notifying that the second suggestive effect will be executed,
The effect determining means executes respective effects of the first suggesting effect, the second suggesting effect, the third suggesting effect, the first preparation effect, and the second preparation effect. It is possible to individually decide whether or not
Based on the determination of the effect determining means, the suggestive effect executing means and the preparation effect executing means can execute the third suggestive effect, the first preparation effect and the second preparation effect in parallel during the same period. and
The third suggestion is higher when neither the first preparation effect nor the second preparation effect is executed than when either the first preparation effect or the second preparation effect is executed. The production is easy to execute,
The preparation effect execution means is capable of executing the first preparation effect by a first pattern and a second pattern having a lower rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first pattern when executed,
The first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the first pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period, while the first preparation effect and the third suggestive effect of the second pattern can be executed in parallel during the same period. and do not run
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the second suggestive effect corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images